Home
        Toshiba 42HP95 Flat Panel Television User Manual
         Contents
1.        To return to the normal picture     Press any button        White    A white pattern is displayed on the whole screen     To display the white pattern   1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   2  Highlight Long Life and press P     3  Press A or W to highlight the White  and then press  ENTER     4 Sleep Timer Picture Shift On  On Off Timer Gray Level 1  PC Settings Reverse    HDMI Audio Auto White  Slide Show Interval 2 Sec  AVHD Skip Time 15 min    Long Life  gt      Sp Navigate     select GL Back EI Exit       To return to the normal picture     Press any button     NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON  PLASMA DISPLAY  Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma display for    extended periods of time  Fixed  non moving  images  including   but not limited to  PIP POP windows  closed captions  video game    patterns  TV station logos  stock tickers  and websites  and  special formats that do not use the entire screen  can become  permanently ingrained in the Plasma display and cause subtle   but permanent  ghost images  This type of damage is NOT  COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY  See pages 4 and 5 for  details     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  95     01E_089 096_4250HP95 95  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 10 PM       Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Displaying TV setting information  on screen using RECALL    Understanding the auto power off  feature       To display TV setting information on screen    Pres
2.        When you connect a D VHS or AVHD device to the TV      The remote control keys  Live  REW  PAUSE  PLAY  FE  etc   are  automatically activated to allow control of live TV        The TV Guide On Screen    system is automatically configured to  allow recording to the device   See Chapters 5 and 7 for details   Also see page 52 for details on setting the AVHD device skip time    e Some programs may not be recorded due to copy protection  restrictions     This TV is compatible with the new Toshiba  Sym bio   Audio Video Hard Drive Recorder     Toshiba s Symbio    AVHD Recorder is designed specifically for  high definition television  HDTV  and offers control over digital  video recording and playback    Think of it as a    tapeless VCR    for digital television  You can  pause  rewind  or use instant replay  so you ll never miss a thing     Symbio also offers one touch recording  of both standard and  High Definition programs through the no fee TV Guide  On Screen    interactive program guide built in to this TV        The unauthorized recording  use  distribution  or revision of television  programs  videotapes  DVDs  and other materials is prohibited under the  Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries  and may subject  you to civil and criminal liability             Note  To enjoy the full benefits of your Symbio AVHD Recorder  you  must first set up the TV Guide On Screen    system  see Chapter 5    Full Symbio AVHD Recorder benefits  including Intelligen
3.       Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer MP3 audio player  continued        Using the JPEG picture viewer    Note  lf you stored both JPEG and MP3 files on the same  memory card  the JPEG picture viewer will start automatically  when you insert the memory card in the TV  To start the audio  player  you must first press EXIT to close the picture viewer and  then start the audio player while the memory card is still  inserted  See    To start the MP3 audio player when a memory  card is already inserted     on page 92  You cannot use the  picture viewer and audio player at the same time     To view digital photos on your TV   1  Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card  slot on the side of your TV    Note      Never insert more than one memory card at a time      Be sure to insert the card correctly   label side facing left and  the end with the notched corner  if applicable  inserted into the  memory card slot      When a CompactFlash memory card is inserted correctly  the  ejector button pops out  see illustration below      Memory card slots    TV side panel                     bb Resin  DO NOT REMOVE   MEMORY CARD  WHILE IN USE                    CompactFlash  ejector button          i   or To resume the slide show  press ENTER again       e To rotate the picture  press or P  and then press ENTER     p   3 Tu   To select another image  press A or V  and then press  ompactFlas    xD Picture Card MMC   memory card ENTER    MultiMediaCard    To stop the slid
4.      4  The following screen appears  Highlight    Set up TV Guide  On Screen    now    and press ENTER to continue        Your TV is eqiidippedt with tive TV Guide On Serawn        iacraccive Program Guide  which provides program hastings   na touch recording  and more     all subscription FREE     Pemo fotiow the on screen setup instructions to erwtste your    TV Gudde On Screen aystem now   Or  press the GUIDE Key on  your TV remote at any time    What wouid you fike to do now   Setup TW Guide On Screen now  Remind me to wt  amp  up later    Don   t remind me agen    pine TV iwal  doe tag  gt your ewen  porn Pra bier    Katne     Interactive TV papan linge  and arenan     eave seconting     samh bo sipam by  tegere ee bye   eck naa manh    Fading Out What s On TV Har Never Been Easter        Press De ENTER bury on your TV recto te Sein wets          Configuring the location of your TV    Screen 1  Select the TV location  USA or Canada   and then  press ENTER     Fy PE EE  To uapply your TV with correct program sing the TV Gude On soven     stem heeds 1 know your TY s locaton    Which country is your TV located in           Screen 2  Enter the ZIP code  U S A   or postal code  Canada   for your location  use the Number buttons on the remote  control for numbers and the AW buttons for letters   and  then press ENTER  Screen 3 appears     eri raya ng a TV it On Ke To soppy yn TV wth correct py inga  Bu TY Gut On er  ei laen ic a cr cease syrien seed to Linc the town or ty whe
5.      EXIT     Press to close an on screen menu instantly        MENU  ENTER      Press to access the menu system  see  page 37   When a menu is on screen or the TV Guide  On Screen    program guide is open  the MENU button on  the side panel functions as the ENTER button       ARROWS AV lt 4  gt      When a menu is on screen  these      The MENU button on the TV side panel functions as the ENTER  button in the TV Guide On Screen    system or when a menu is          POWER          CHANNEL AY     When no menu is on screen  these  buttons change the channel  programmed channels only  see  page 44   When a menu is on screen  these buttons function  as up down menu navigation buttons        VOLUME  lt  gt      When no menu is on screen  these  buttons adjust the volume level  When a menu is on screen   these buttons function as left right menu navigation  buttons     GUIDE     Press to access the TV Guide On Screen     program guide   See page 55 for details on using the  program guide        VIDEO 3     The side panel A V connections are referred to  as    VIDEO 3    and include standard A V connections plus  optional S video   The VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2 A V  connections are on the TV   s back panel  see page 11        Memory card slots     Insert a memory card into one of  the memory card slots to view JPEG files  such as photos  as  a    slide show    on your TV or listen to MP3 audio files  see  page 89       3  Headphone jack     For use with headphones     Note  When the Headph
6.      GO TO SERVICE BAR  Closes the menu  changes no  information  and returns to the Service Bar        WATCH NOW  Exits the TV Guide On Screen    system  and tunes to the highlighted show        DELETE RECORDING  Removes the recording from  the schedule  A Confirm panel menu displays  Press YES  to delete the recording or NO to close the panel menu        EDIT RECORDING  Opens a menu in which you can  change existing recording information        SET REMINDER  Opens a menu in which you can set a  reminder for the show  Record is not cancelled         SET RECORDING  Opens a menu in which you can  set a recording for a show  reminder is not cancelled        DELETE REMINDER  Removes the reminder from the  schedule  A confirm panel menu displays  Select YES to  delete the reminder or NO to close the panel menu        EDIT REMINDER  Opens a menu in which you can  change existing reminder information        CANCEL  Closes the panel menu  changes no  information  and returns to the highlighted show     An icon identifies the  event type  For   more details  see     Record features     at  right  and    Remind  features    on page 65           Record features    You can set a show to Record  or edit the record settings for a  show  in LISTINGS  SEARCH  and SCHEDULE  There are  three ways to set a show to Record  as described below     1  Set a show to Record using the REC key on the  remote control  Press REC on the remote control to record the show Once  with current default setting
7.     3     Oo PEW UTI   AS  s I       A  CHA  VOL A   RECALL   SLOW SKIP  Ge   CDE   REW _PAUSE STEP__ PLAY  Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  33     01E_028 036_4250HP95 33  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 06 PM     01E_02   036_4250HP95  Black    Chapter 3  Using the remote control       Programming the remote control to operate your other devices  continued        Using the volume lock feature  8000     For the TV  CABLE SAT  VCR  and DVD modes  the volume  controls  VOL AW and MUTE  can be locked to the selected  device mode  This feature does not apply to the AUDIO 1 and    AUDIO 2 modes     To lock the volume controls to always control the  CABLE SAT device volume  for example    1  Repeatedly press MODE to select CABLE SAT mode     2  While holding down the RECALL button  press 8     0     0     0   3  Press VOL A   The CABLE SAT mode light will blink two times  locked    To reset the volume controls to the original device mode   1  While holding down RECALL  press 8     0 0 0     2  Press VOL V   The mode light will blink four times  unlocked      Operational feature reset  8900     This feature clears all setup features not related to    Device code  setup    and resets the Volume Lock to    TV        To reset the features   While holding down the RECALL button  press 8    9    0      0  The Mode indicator will blink two times  and then pause    and blink two more times       DCBLISAT     SIVCRIPR     AVD    gt  samo Number
8.     o gt                If the Input Selection window does not appear when you press INPUT on the remote control or  TV VIDEO on the TV side panel  press INPUT or TV VIDEO a second time  which will change to the next  video input source and display the Input Selection window      If you cannot view signals from external devices connected to VIDEO 1  VIDEO 2  VIDEO 3  or  ColorStream   or from channels 3 or 4  make sure the Input Lock is set to Off  page 99        Set the Closed Caption feature to Off  page 84    e The station may have broadcast difficulties  Try another channel   e Adjust the Tint and or Color  page 81      e When the ColorStream   signal source is active  the VIDEO OUT terminal outputs blank video  To receive  video from the VIDEO OUT signal  a standard video or S video IN terminal must be used instead of the  ColorStream   connections     e The VIDEO OUT terminal will not output the POP picture  pages 19 and 78        If you label all of the inputs as    Hide     the POP feature will be disabled  If you then attempt to access the  POP feature  the message    Not available    will appear on screen  page 78         Picture and sound are out of sync   As with all products that contain a digital display  in rare instances  when viewing certain content  e g            television broadcasts  video games  DVD   you may notice that the sound and picture are slightly out of  sync  This phenomenon can be caused by various factors including  without limitation  video 
9.     recording  features  Chapters 5 and 7   The other can be used with the TV   s IR pass through  feature  page 22  and TheaterNet    on screen device control feature  page 47    Note  The two IR blaster G LINK    cables included with your TV have specific characteristics that  allow them to work properly with this TV s IR OUT and G LINK    ports  Never use other  aftermarket IR blaster or G LINK    cables with this TV  Other cables may not function  properly and can cause damage  THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR  TOSHIBA WARRANTY        Optical audio cable is for connecting receivers with Dolby Digital or PCM   pulse code modulation  optical audio input to the TV   s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  terminal  See page 21     1 2 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      E  42 50HP95  web 213 276          G    Coaxial  F type  cable       Standard A V cables  red white yellow              2   lt     ideo cable                                     Component video cables  red green blue     HDMI cable    E  gt     IEEE1394 cable  4 pin                          Dual wand IR blaster G LINK    cable   2 included     DO  m    Optical audio cable                Note  Although your TV includes both HDMI  and IEEE1394 connections  it may not  operate with another device you have that  includes such a connection  For example  the   EEE1394 ports are not intended to operate  with current model Mini DV camcorders  and  the HDMI input is not intended for  connection to a
10.    If no choice is made within 3 minutes  the notification banner  closes automatically and completes the highlighted item  default  is HIDE REMINDERS      Note  lf more than two reminders are set for the same time   arrows appear on the Reminder notification banner  Press AW  to highlight the shows     hide reminders a       Remind conflict  A conflict message appears for the following reasons     e A show set with an auto tune Reminder has the same start  time as an existing auto tune Reminder     e A show set with an auto tune Reminder overlaps with a  scheduled Recording     Select one of these options     e Auto Tune Anyway   This show will override an existing  show set to auto tune        Proceed  No Auto Tune   Set the show as a Reminder but  do not auto tune        Don   t Set This Reminder   Cancels the Reminder           Remind icons    Following is a description of the Remind icons that will appear  on the tile for a show set to Remind     Remind Once w    Displays a show reminder one time     AEN  Remind Regularly RI    Displays a show reminder every  time the show airs on the same channel and starts at the same  time     EN  Remind Daily E    Displays a show Reminder every  weekday  Monday through Friday  for the same channel and    start time     Note  This icon displays for manual reminders only     rA  Remind Suspend  a     Reminder is Suspended due to a    schedule conflict  show remains in Schedule      3  Remind Off A    Keeps the Reminder in the schedule 
11.    RESUME  Starts from the beginning or from where it  was last stopped  if viewed previously         PLAY FROM BEGINNING  Starts from the beginning   even if stopped previously        DELETE EPISODE  Deletes the episode from the  RECORDINGS list and deletes the recording from the  TEEE1394 recording device  A Confirm panel menu  displays  Press YES to delete the episode or NO to close  the panel menu        CANCEL  Closes the panel menu  changes no  information  and returns to the highlighted show              The unauthorized recording  use  distribution  or revision of television  programs  videotapes  DVDs  and other materials is prohibited under the  Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries  and may subject  you to civil and criminal liability              62 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_059 064_4250HP95 62  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 08 PM          _    aS       SS       SS a    Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       TV Guide On Screen    Services  continued        SCHEDULE screen    The SCHEDULE service screen allows you to review  edit  or  delete Record and Remind events you set previously            e With SCHEDULE highlighted in the Service Bar  press INFO  to display a help screen  Press INFO again to close the screen     nr    e Highlight an event and press MENU to display the Schedule  Options panel menu  with the following options  as applicable    
12.    all    TOSHIBA    Owner   s MANUAL       Integrated High Definition    To display a High Definition picture  the TV must be  receiving a High Definition signal  such as an over the air  High Definition TV broadcast  a High Definition digital cable  program  or a High Definition digital satellite program   For  details  please contact your TV antenna installer or your  cable or satellite provider     For an overview of steps for setting up  and using your new TV  see page 9     42HP95  5OHP9S5       2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All Rights Reserved    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Plasma Television    Compatible with the new Toshiba    Symbio     Audio Video Hard Drive Recorder       See pages 24 and 52 for details  J    Owner   s Record   The model number and serial number are on the back  of your TV  Record these numbers in the spaces below   Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate  with your Toshiba dealer about this TV     Mode  nr   A    23566699A    Dear Customer    Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba Plasma television  This  manual will help you use the many exciting features of your  new Plasma television    Before operating your Plasma television  please read this  manual completely and keep it nearby for future reference     Safety Precautions    WARNING  TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR  ELECTRIC SHOCK  DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE  TO RAIN OR MOISTURE     RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  DO NOT OPEN    WARNING  TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC    SHOCK  DO NOT 
13.    choose among Once  Regularly  Weekly or Off   4  Highlight the POWER ON TV field  and press or  gt     to choose either Yes  to turn on the TV automatically  if  off  at the scheduled Reminder time  or No  default      5  Highlight the AUTO TUNE TV field  and press  lt  or  gt   to choose either Yes  to automatically tune the TV to the  channel you are setting the Reminder for at the  scheduled Reminder time  the TV must be on at the  time  or No  default      Note  You can change the default values of the Remind  Options panel menu fields  See    Change default options    on  page 68 for details    6  Highlight the WHEN field  to set a time for displaying  the reminder screen   and press  lt  or P to choose in the  range from 15 minutes early to 15 minutes late or On  Time  default   1 minute early      7  Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER   and press ENTER again to close the menu  A Remind  icon for the selected frequency appears on the show tile   See    Remind icons    on page 66     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_065 068_4250HP95 65  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the  menu  change no information  and return to the    highlighted show     2  Manually set a show Reminder  1  Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar  and press  MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu   2  Highlight NEW MANUAL REMINDER and press  ENTER to display the Remind Options panel menu   Pres
14.    the TV     e Place the TV on the floor or a sturdy  level  stable surface that can  support the weight of the unit  Secure the TV to a wall  pillar  or  ther immovable structure as described on page 3  item 19     0  e Place the TV in a location where light does not reflect on the  screen     e Place the TV far enough from walls and other objects to allow  proper ventilation  Inadequate ventilation may cause  overheating  which will damage the TV  THIS TYPE OF  DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA  WARRANTY     e Read    Installation    on pages 3 4        e Read    Important notes about your Plasma TV    on page 5       Do not plug in any power cords until AFTER you have    connected all cables and devices to your TV       BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV  learn    the functions of the TV s connections and controls  pages 10  and 11        Connect your other electronic device s  to the TV     pages 13 27        Connect the G LINK    cable  either one of the enclosed IR    blaster cables  from your VCR and or Cable box  if applicable   to the G LINK    terminal so you can use the TV Guide   On Screen    features  applies to VCRs and cable boxes only    See page 26     Install the batteries in the remote control  page 30        See    Learning about the remote control     pages 28 29     for an overview of the buttons on the remote control       Program the remote control to operate your other    device s   pages 30 36      Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORAT
15.    wee 43  Configuring the antenna input sources     vee 43  Programming channels into the TV   s channel memory        44  Programming channels automatically 0s 44   Manually adding and deleting channels in the   channel MENO canonui ke 45  Programming your favorite channels     ssssssssssssssssessseereessee 46    Setting up and using TheaterNet    on screen  device control wee  Setting up TheaterNet s  Using the TheaterNet control icons    cesses 48  TheaterNet IR device codes cesses 49 51  Setting the AVHD device skip time    ecscseeessesseeeeeeeeens 52  Setting the HDMI    audio mode wu    ecseeseeeestessesteseeees  Setting the time and date     Viewing the CableCARD    menu  Viewing the digital signal meter             Viewing the system Status       ccsceesessesesseseestssesseeeeneeeees  Restore Factory Defaults         c ssscsssssssecesseseeeeeaseneeees       Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen          Interactive program guide         cecseerecneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenenes  Setting up the TV Guide On Screen    system      Navigating the TV Guide On Screen    system               ss  TV Guide On Screen    remote control functions          56  Video Window  sena eii E E E 57  Panel Men  s ndisenciniayeiann 57  Info Bor anora aa a a eisi iea et 58    TV Guide On Screen    Icons     TV Guide On Screen    Services                   LISTINGS screen           0000 34599  SEARCH screen anana anan o aeaa 60  RECORDINGS screen   ssseseseseseseseesssesesrsrsesssrsesssseses 62 
16.   3  Plug the G LINK     IR blaster  cable   s plug into the TV   s sensor  G LINK    terminal                             G LINK     IR blaster  cable wand  For details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen    system   approx  1 inch from device     See Chapter 5  TV back panel    For details on using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive  program guide   See Chapter 7         If you cannot locate the device   s infrared sensor        1  Turn OFF the device  wn abouts  2  Starting at the lower left corner of the device  place the end of the na   device   s remote control  with the infrared emitter  so it touches the ia   front of the device and press POWER   Do not use the TV s remote   control for this step      3  If the device turns on  the point at which the remote control touched  the device is the location of the sensor    4  If the device does not turn on  move the remote control slightly to the  right and press POWER again        5  Repeat step 4 until you locate the device s infrared sensor           26 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_013  027_4250HP95 26 05 9 12  10 06 PM    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting a personal computer  PC        This connection allows you to view the image of a personal  computer  PC  on the TV screen  When connecting a PC to the  TY  use an analog RGB  15 pin  computer cable and a PC  audio cable         To use a PC  set the monitor output resolution o
17.   3  Using the remote control       Learning about the remote control       The buttons used for operating the TV only are described here  For a  complete list of the remote control s functions  see the remote control  functional key chart on pages 31 32     For a list of the buttons that operate the TV Guide On Screen    system  see  page 56    POWER turns the TV on and off    SLEEP accesses the sleep timer  page 93      LIGHT The first press of the LIGHT button lights the keypad and turns on  the Illumination mode  With the Illumination mode on  pressing any other  key lights the keypad for 5 seconds  10 seconds if you re in programming  mode   Subsequent presses of the LIGHT button toggle between turning  the Illumination mode on and off     Channel Numbers  0 9    100  directly tune channels  The           button is used  to tune digital channels  page 73  or to display the favorite channel list   page 46      INPUT selects the video input source  page 69      MODE cycles through the six device modes  TV  CBL SAT  VCR PVR   DVD  AUDIO1  and AUDIO2  The mode indicator light will remain lit  for a few seconds  page 30      PIC SIZE cycles through the five pictures sizes  Natural  TheaterWide 1 2 3   and Full  page 74      TheaterNet    DEVICE displays a list of available TheaterNet devices  page 48    TheaterNet    CTRL accesses the on screen IR device control icons  page 48      MENU accesses the main TV menu system  pages 37 and 38  or opens a  menu in the TV Guide On Scr
18.   Audio Setup        Press W or A to highlight the WOW feature you want to  adjust  and then press 4 or P to adjust the item     WOW  SRS 3D Off  WOW  FOCUS Off  WOW  TruBass Low  Reset Done  e WOW  SRS 3D     To turn the surround sound effect On  or Off   Note  If the broadcast is monaural  the 3D effect does not  work   e WOW  FOCUS     To turn the vocal emphasis effect On  or Off     e WOW  TruBass     To select the desired bass expansion  level  High  Low  or Off      5  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER     Turning off the built in speakers    Use this feature to turn off the TV speakers when you connect  an audio system to your TV  see    Connecting a digital audio  system    and    Connecting an analog audio system    on page 21      To turn off the built in speakers   1  Press MENU and open the Audio menu       WOW  SRS and C   symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs  Inc   WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs  Inc        2  Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER        Audio Settings  Advanced Audio Settings  Audio Setup    3  Press W to highlight the Speakers field  and then press  lt  or  P to select Off     MTS Stereo  Language English  Speakers  lt  On  gt   Optical Output Format Dolby Digital  Reset Done    4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER    To turn on the bui
19.   Show is set to record once     Other frequencies are Daily  manual recording only     pa LA  Regularly  and Weekly     Record Off   Show is set to record but recording is currently Off  show remains in schedule               7 Record e Recording is suspended due to a schedule conflict  show remains in schedule    i  Suspended e Recording resumes when the conflict no longer exists     wj Remind Once    Show is set to remind once  pe      Other frequencies are Daily  manual reminding only   eo Ee  Regularly  and Weekly              K Remind Off   Show is set to remind but reminder is currently Off  show remains in schedule    i Remind e Reminder is suspended due to a schedule conflict  show remains in schedule    2 Suspended   Reminder resumes when the conflict no longer exists        58 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_05  058_4250HP95 58 05 9 12  10 08 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       TV Guide On Screen    Services       The TV Guide On Screen    system consists of five main services  LISTINGS  SEARCH  RECORDINGS  SCHEDULE  and SETUP     Note      For the RECORDINGS service to display  an IEEE1394 recording device must be connected to the television  see Chapter 2   otherwise  only  four services display  Recording to other devices  such as a VCR  are possible from within the LISTINGS service      When using the TV Guide On Screen    system to record a 
20.   The    tune channel    is the channel on which you receive  a station  For example  two viewers in the same zip code may  receive the same station on different channel numbers   depending on whether they have Cable service or are using a  cable box   e Switch a channel to one of the following settings       On  channel is always displayed in LISTINGS       Off  channel is never displayed in LISTINGS       Auto Hide  channel is displayed in LISTINGS only    when program information is available       From the SETUP screen  highlight CHANGE CHANNEL  DISPLAY and press ENTER               2  Highlight the channel row you want to edit and press  ENTER to display the Grid Options panel menu     3  To edit the options  press INFO and follow the on screen  instructions     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  67     01E_065 068_4250HP95 67  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM               Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       TV Guide On Screen    Services  continued        SETUP screen  continued   Change default options    This option allows you to change default settings in the  following categories    e General Defaults   e Record Defaults   e Remind Defaults    General defaults    1  From the SETUP screen  highlight CHANGE DEFAULT  OPTIONS and press ENTER           2  Highlight GENERAL DEFAULTS and press MENU to  display the General defaults panel menu         aie T       3  Enter the following i
21.   The consumer electronics industry is committed  to making home entertainment enjoyable and safe          The Consumer Electronics Association formed  the Home Entertainment Support Safety  Committee  comprised of TV and consumer      electronics furniture manufacturers  to advocate    children   s safety and educate consumers and their  f families about television safety       Tune Into Safety      One size does NOT fit all  Use appropriate furniture large enough to  support the weight of your TV  and other electronic components      0 Use appropriate angle braces  straps  and anchors to secure your  furniture to the wall  but never screw anything directly into the TV          Carefully read and understand the other enclosed instructions for  proper use of this product     Q Do not allow children to climb on or play with furniture and TVs            Avoid placing any item on top of your TV  such as a VCR  remote  control  or toy  that a curious child may reach for     OQ Remember that children can become excited while watching  a program and can potentially push or pull a TV over     O Share our safety message about this hidden hazard of the home  with your family and friends  Thank you   www CE org    CEA is the Sponsor  Producer and    Consumer Electronics Association Manager of the International CES         2500 Wilson Blvd   Arlington  VA 22201 U S A   Tel  703 907 7600 Fax 703 907 7690                05 9 12  10 05 PM    Important Safety Instructions        E  1  Read 
22.   use the Restore Factory Defau  54     Its procedure as described on page       Channel tuning problems    e Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode  page 30    e The channel may have been erased from the channel memory by the Channel Add Delete feature  Add    the channel to the channel memory  page 45    e The channel may be blocked by the Channels Block feature  Unblock    the channel  page 99      e If you are unable to tune digital channels  check the antenna configuration  page 43   If you are still  unable to tune digital channels  clear all channels from the channel list  page 45  and reprogram       channels into the channel memory  page 44   If you are still unable to  Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 54  Also se    page     tune digital channels  use the  e    Other problems     on the next       Closed caption problems       e If the program or video you selected is not closed captioned  no capti   page 84     e If text is not available  a black rectangle may appear on screen  If this  caption feature  page 84      ons will display on screen    happens  turn off the closed    e A closed caption signal may not display correctly in the following situations  a  when a videotape has    been dubbed  b  when the signal reception is weak  or c  when the s   page 84      ignal reception is nonstandard       Rating Blocking  V Chip  problems    e If you forget your PIN code  While the PIN code entering screen is displayed  pre
23.   v AVHD Skip Time 15 min          Navigate     Select GHI Back EI Exit    3  Open the Terrestrial menu  highlight Signal Meter  and  press ENTER     meal    Input Configuration  Channel program  Channel Add Delete       Navigate     select GHD Back BI Exit       4  Use the AV P buttons to select the antenna input and  digital channel whose signal you want to check   Note  The physical digital channel number listed in the Signal  Meter screen may not correspond to a virtual TV channel  number  Contact your local broadcasters to obtain the RF  channel numbers for your local digital stations     Signal Locked    oul o Peake  Antenna 1  Physical Digital Channel 13  Virtual Digital Channel N A  Pe    To close the screen and return to the Terrestrial menu   Highlight Done and press ENTER     To return to normal viewing   Press EXIT     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  53     01E_046 054_4250HP95 53  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 08 PM    Chapter 6  Setting up your TV       Viewing the system status       To check the system status   1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   2  Highlight Installation and press ENTER   A new set of    Installation menu icons will appear on screen  as shown    below right            ET  Installation System Infomation  Sleep Timer  On Off Timer  PC Settings  HDMI Audio Auto  Slide Show Interval 2 Sec   y AVHD Skip Time 15 min     TpNavigate     Select GTM Back Exar ExIt  GpNavigate     Select GI Back  EI E
24.  036_4250HP95 29 05 9 12  10 06 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Chapter 3  Using the remote control       Installing the remote control batteries       To install the remote control batteries     Caution  Always dispose of batteries in a designated disposal location  Never    throw batteries into a fire     1  Slide the battery cover off the back of the remote control             gt     2  Install two    AA    size alkaline batteries  Match the   and     symbols on    the batteries to the symbols on the battery compartment              3  Slide the battery cover on to the remote control until the lock snaps        Caution   Never throw batteries into a fire     Note   e Be sure to use AA size batteries   e Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area     e Batteries should always be disposed of with the  environment in mind  Always dispose of batteries in  accordance with applicable laws and regulations     e  f the remote control does not operate correctly  or if  the operating range becomes reduced  replace  batteries with new ones     e When necessary to replace batteries in the remote  control  always replace both batteries with new ones   Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries  in combination     e Always remove batteries from remote control if they  are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for  an extended period of time  This will prevent battery  acid from leaking into the battery compartment        Using the remote control M
25.  0571  0717  0822  Rotel 0623  Rowa 0823  Sampo 0698  Samsung 0573  0820  Sansui 0695  Sanyo 0670  Sharp 0630  Sherwood 0633  Shinsonic 0533  Sony 0533  0864  1533  Sylvania 0675  0821  Technics 0490  Techwood 0692  Theta Digital 0571  Toshiba 0503  0695  1045  Tredex 0800  Urban Concepts 0503  XBox 0522    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 08 PM       51    Chapter 6  Setting up your TV       Setting the AVHD device skip time    Setting the time and date       When you connect an external AVHD  audio video hard drive   device   such as the Toshiba Symbio    AVHD Recorder   to  one of the TV   s IEEE1394 ports  you can use the AVHD device  skip time feature to set the number of minutes the device will  skip forward or backward when you press the SKIP buttons     Note       This TV will work best with the Toshiba Symbio  AVHD  Recorder for recording high definition and standard definition  material from either tuner and for controlling live TV  pause rewind   etc    When the Symbio    AVHD Recorder is connected to the TV   the remote control keys  Live  STOP REW  PAUSE  PLAY  etc   are  automatically activated to allow pausing of live TV      When you connect an AVHD  or D VHS  device  the TV Guide  On Screen    system is automatically configured to allow recording   See page 24 for device connection information  See Chapters 5 and  7 for details about setting up and using the TV Guide On screen       syste
26.  1189  1269   0189  0391  1120    50       Receivers  cont      Brand    Pioneer    Polk Audio  Proscan  Quasar  RCA    Realistic  Samsung  Sansui  Sanyo  Sharp  Sherwood  Sony    Soundesign  Stereophonics  Sunfire   Teac   Technics    Thorens  Venturer  Victor    Wards    Yamaha  Yorx    Zenith    Code  1023  0014  0080   0150  0244  0531   0630  1384  0189  1254  0039  1023  1254  0080   0531  1390  1609  0181  0195  1295  1089  0189  0801  1251  0186  1286  0491  0502  1653  1058  1258  1158   0158  0474  1367   1558  1658 1758       0670   1023   313   0463   1308  1309  1518   0039  0309   189   390   0074   0014  0080  0158    0189  0176  0186  1176    0195  0857    Satellite receivers    Brand  AlphaStar  Chaparral  Crossdigital  DishPro  Echostar  Expressvu  GE   GOI  General Instrument  HTS  Hitachi  Hughes Network Systems  JVC  Magnavox  Memorex  Mitsubishi  Motorola  Next Level  Panasonic  Paysat  Philips    Proscan    RCA    RadioShack  SKY  Samsung    Sony  Star Choice    Code   0772   0216   1109   1005  0775   1005  0775   0775   0566   0775   0869   0775   0819   1142  0749  1749  0775   0724  0722   0724   0749   0869   0869   0247  0701   0724   1142  0749  0724    1076  0722  1749   0392   0392  0566  0855    0143   0869   0856   1109   0639   0869       Satellite receivers  cont      Brand  Toshiba    Uniden  Zenith    VCRs   Brand  Admiral  Adventura  Aiko   Aiwa   Akai   America Action  American High  Asha   Audiovox  Beaumark   Bell  amp  Howell  Brokso
27.  69 and 73    e If you connected a Symbio    AVHD recorder  in order to use its full functionality  you must first set up the   TV Guide On Screen    system  page 24 and Chapter 5               TV stops responding to controls   If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV side panel and you cannot turn off       the TV  press and hold the POWER button on the TV side panel for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV        Other problems         If your TV s problem has not been addressed in this Troubleshooting section or the recommended  solution has not worked  use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 54         01E_101 106_4250HP95  Black    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  1 03    103 05 9 12  10 11 PM     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Chapter 10  Troubleshooting       TV Guide On Screen    FAQs       104    After you set up the TV Guide On Screen    system  Chapter 5   the  program guide opens automatically by default when you turn on  the TV  You can turn off the automatic program guide  see page 42     and instead press the TV GUIDE button on the remote control to  manually open the TV Guide On Screen    program guide        SETUP    1  Q  What if I move and my ZIP code or postal code  changes     A  Highlight Setup in the Service Bar  Press W to highlight    Change System Settings  page 67   and then press ENTER     Follow the on screen prompts to enter new information   see Chapter 5 for details   I
28.  7  Using the TV Guide On Screen     interactive program guide    The TV Guide On Screen    system is a free  interactive   on screen program guide built in to your Toshiba TV that lists  schedules and information for TV programs in your area   Note  Over the air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide  On Screen    data is required for the TV Guide On Screen    system to  operate  The TV Guide On Screen    system does not work with satellite  programming  Toshiba does not provide the TV Guide On Screen    data   rather  such data is provided by a third party  which is responsible for its  accuracy and availability  Additionally  occasional compatibility issues may  exist between the TV Guide On Screen    system contained in your TV and  the data provided by the third party  If you experience any performance  issues with your TV Guide On Screen    system  please contact the  following     e In the U S   call TACP Consumer Solutions at  800  631 3811 or  visit http   www tacp com customersupport contact asp     In Canada  call TCL Customer Service at 1 800 268 3404     The TV Guide On Screen    system includes the following  features        Streamlined on screen assisted setup   Quickly and easily set  up your TV Guide On Screen    system using the on screen  prompts  see    Setting up the TV Guide On Screen    system     below     e Program listings and INFO windows   Scroll through eight  days of TV listings and view program information such as  rating  stereo  HDTV  n
29.  Audio Setup  menu  above   Also see    Turning off the built in speakers    on  page 88        Connecting an analog audio system       This connection allows you to use external speakers with an  external audio amplifier to adjust the sound level     You will need    gt  one pair of standard audio cables  To control the audio     Turn on the TV and the stereo amplifier            Turn off the TV   s built in speakers  see    Turning off the built in  speakers    on page 88         Note  To hear sound when using an external audio amplifier   the volume of both the TV and the amplifier must be set to a  reasonable listening level     VIDEO  SVIDEO    Theater Net   ANT  outi ouT2  OO jf    pow  VIDEO 2   a HOMI AUDI  R L     amp   ARIAL am  AUDIO             P  Py  Ar D   AUL      AUDIO Re    AUDIO   ps A A T  HHI    a      R R LS       Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  2 1     01E_013 027_4250HP95 21 05 9 12  10 06 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Controlling infrared remote controlled devices through the TV  IR pass through        Front of IR controlled DVD player  for example     You can use the TV   s IR OUT terminal  infrared pass through   to remotely operate  through the TV  many infrared remote   controlled devices  such as a Toshiba infrared remote controlled  VCR or DVD player  enclosed within an entertainment center  or similar cabinet  Without the IR OUT connection  the device  typically would n
30.  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting IEEE1394 video devices       You can use the two bi directional IEEE1394 ports on the back  of your TV to connect digital video devices that meet CEA  specifications for IEEE1394     Because these ports are bi directional  they can be used for both  playback and recording    e Because IEEE1394 is an evolving technology  it is possible that some  or all of the connectivity features of a device you connect to the TV  through the  EEE1394 ports may not operate  You should confirm  that the devices you desire to use with the IEEE1394 ports will  operate with those ports      This TV does not support all possible EEE 1394 signal types  For  information on signals supported by the IEEE1394 ports  see     Supported signals    at right        EEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information   separate audio cables are not required     You will need    gt  one  or two  IEEE1394 cable s     Note  The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this  TV must be S400  400 Mbps maximum       gt  additional A V cables if your device is analog compatible   see    Using analog compatible IEEE1394 devices    below      TV back panel Two bi directional IEEE1394 ports          1  t  NN         CableCARD        From IEEE1394 devices   such as AVHD or D VHS     Using analog compatible IEEE1394    devices    Some digital IEEE1394 devices are compatible with analog  signals  For example  some D VHS 
31.  Black    Code  0406   0674   0269   0300   0160   0078   0892   0331   0892   0269   0165   0269  0892  0321  0269  0264   0321  0395  0300  0308  0521  0246  0892  0269  0013  0300  0892  0269  0300   0395   0321   0264  0689  0220  0078  0211  0308  0521  0331  0078  0013  0211  0354  0133    Code  0003  0008  0014  0007  0011  0017  0899  0014  0899  0019  0476  0015  0015  0476  0003  0276   0011  0810  0144  0009  0020  0273  0011  0007  0015  0476  0003  0276   0012  0014  0015   0011  0810  0000  0476  1106  0276   0810  0019  0007  0237  0000  0107  0000  0305  0317  0877  0144  0533   1877  0000  0000    49       Cable boxes  cont      Brand  RadioShack  Regal  Rembrandt  Runco   Samsung  Scientific Atlanta    Signal  Signature  sony  Starcom  Stargate  Starquest  Supercable  Tocom  Torx  Toshiba  Tusa  United Artists  Zenith    CD players  Brand   Aiwa   Burmester  California Audio Labs  Carver   Classic   DKK   DMX Electronics  Denon   Emerson   Fisher   GPX   Garrard   Genexxa  Harman Kardon  Hitachi   JVC   KLH    Kenwood    Koss   Krell   LXI   Linn  MCS  MTC  Magnavox  Marantz    Miro  Mission  NSM  Nikko  Onkyo  Optimus    Panasonic  Parasound  Philips    Pioneer    Polk Audio    Code   0015   0020  0273  0279   0011   0000   0144   0877  0008  0017   0477  1877   0015   0011   1006   0003  0015   0015   0015   0276   0012   0003   0000   0015   0007   0000  0525  0899       Code  0157  0124  0420  0029  0303  0157  0179  0437  1297  0000  0157  0873  0003  0
32.  Digro    Digit 0  10   Digit 0  100          digital          sub 100  10 oe ae zia  separator  channel   INPUT TV Video TV TV TV TV TV TV TV  select  PIC SIZE Selects the TV TV TV TV TV TV TV  image shape   MENU  Menu      Action      Menu         Menu  ACTION Guide Menu Menu  TV GUIDE SETUP   TV Guide      Guide     DVD setup          Guide  INFO TITLE   Guide Info      INFO     TITLE          INFO  Top menu  TheaterNet TheaterNet              Subtitle     en ADVANCE  DEVICE SUB TITLE   Device  TheaterNet TheaterNet              Audio              CTRL AUDIO Control  ENTER Enter     Enter  Select       Enter         Enter  A Menu select       Menu select       Menu select          Menu select  up up up up  v Menu select       Menu select       Menu select          Menu select  down down down down   lt  gt  Menu select      Menu select       Menu select          Menu select  left right left right left right left right  EXIT  Exit     Exit     DVD clear          EXIT  DVD CLEAR  CH AV Channel Channel Channel Channel     Channel     Channel  PAGE       up down   up down up down up down up down up down  Page up down  VOL AV Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume  up down    up down    up down    up down    up down    up down    up down    up down    CH RTN  Previous Previous Previous     DVD              DVD RIN channel channel channel return  Live Live                         Live TV  RECALL On screen              On screen               display display  Copy
33.  Done    4  Highlight Done and press ENTER     Note     When a power failure occurs  the sleep timer setting may be cleared       To display the amount of time left on the sleep timer  press RECALL     To display the remaining sleep time     Select Not Set in step 3 above  Press SLEEP See Tie  J 4   A  Note  A message will display 1h10m   Turn TV ON  on screen when there is one v   Day  lt  Not Set  gt    walt  minute remaining on the sleep  timer    Reset Cancel Done  Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  93     01E_089 096_4250HP95 93  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 10 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Using the PC setting feature    Using the Long Life feature       You can adjust the horizontal position size  vertical position size   clock phase  and sampling clock  This feature will be grayed out  on the menu unless there is a PC connected to the TV  See     Connecting a personal computer  PC     on page 27      To set the PC setting   1  Confirm a PC is connected  see    Connecting a personal  computer  PC     on page 27      2  Repeatedly press INPUT to select PC input mode   See     Selecting the video input source to view    on page 69      3  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   4  Highlight PC Settings and press ENTER     Installation  Sleep Timer  On Off Timer    PC Settings   HDMI Audio Auto   Slide Show Interval 2 Sec  w AVHD Skip Time 15 min     GpNavigate  S  select GM  Back ExT Exit       5  Press A or 
34.  E a         FREEZE Freeze TV TV TV TV TV TV TV  Note        u    n             key does not send a signal   e     lt     TV      key will operate the TV    1  Backlight key is toggle  Does not send IR signal      2 Volume will punch through to TV by default  When the volume is unlocked  all the devices will have their own volume if their ID has  volume data  The AUDIO modes  receiver  CD  will have their own volume if volume lock is done to TV  CBL SAT VCR PVR  or DVD  mode  See    Using the volume lock feature    on page 34     32     01E_028 036_4250HP95    32    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     05 9 12  10 06 PM    Chapter 3  Using the remote control       Programming the remote control to operate your other devices       Device code setup    1  Refer to the multi brand remote control device code table  on pages 35 and 36 to find the code for the brand of your  device    If more than one code is listed  try each one separately until  you find one that works    2  Press MODE until the Mode indicator for the device   CBL SAT  VCR PVR  DVD  AUDIO 1  AUDIO 2  lights  up    3  While holding down the RECALL button  press the  Channel Number buttons to enter the four digit code for  your brand of device  If a valid code is entered  the mode  indicator will blink twice  If an invalid code is entered  the  mode indicator will blink one long blink    4  Point the remote control at the device and press POWER to  te
35.  For direct channel tuning  priority ordering  and channel editing        digital  separator              digital separator    For entering digital channel numbers        MENU                                                            MENU e Displays the panel menu  in which you can choose options  for example  record  remind  INFO  keyword          i TV GUIDE  INFO   Cycles between levels of information  as available  in a Service screen or other type of screen   ENTER e Makes a selection or executes an action  ENTER  e With a currently airing show listing highlighted  returns to watching TV and tunes to the show  lt  A  gt   channel   e With a future airing show listing highlighted  displays a panel menu with viewing options  PAGE UP   Ava   Provide directional control  DOWN    When watching TV  A and    provide surfing through channels turned ON in the LISTINGS Ga  Cie  pas      screen  SKIP  PAGE UP DOWN   When in the TV Guide On Screen    system  moves from one set of screen information to the kd and  gt  gt   z  next  when applicable  GD t ones  REC   When in the TV Guide On Screen    system or watching TV  initiates the recording process  REC  SPLIT   When in the TV Guide On Screen    system  toggles between locking and unlocking the Video w N  Window  SPLIT  FAV SCAN FREEZE   gt  gt   and led   Jump forward and backward one day in the LISTINGS screen   56 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_05  058_4250HP95 56  Black     E  42 50HP95  w
36.  Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER     Picture Settings    Advanced Picture Settings  Theater Settings          i Navigate     select GH  Back EI Exit    3  In the Cinema Mode field  select Film     Theater Settings    Picture Size Natural  Picture Scroll Le  Cinema Mode  lt  Film  gt   Auto Aspect Ratio On   Reset Done    4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER     To set the Cinema Mode to Video   Select Video in step 3 above     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights     01E_069 080_4250HP95 77    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    reserved     05 9 12  10 09 PM    77    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Using the POP features       Using the POP double window feature    Note   The POP  picture out picture  double window feature splits the screen into two  lt  When the main window is in the ANTI or ANT2  windows so you can watch two programs at the same time  mode  the ANTI and ANT2 inputs cannot be    To display a program in the POP window  selected for the POP window     When the main window is in Video 1 2 3     f ColorStream HD1 HD2  or HDMI mode  those  2  Press SPLIT to open the POP double window  inputs cannot be selected for the POP window     1  Select the program you want to watch in the main window     POP double window   You cannot view IEEE1394 source programs in the      POP window       You cannot view two video or two antenna sources  i
37.  Limited United States Warranty     csssescssseseseeteeeeeteneeeees 108  Limited Canada Warranty       Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_005 007_4250HP95 ri  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 05 PM       1  Introduction       Welcome to Toshiba    Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV  one of the innovative Plasma TVs on the See    Important notes about your  market  The goal of this manual is to guide you through setting up and operating your TV Plasma TV    on page 5   as quickly as possible    e This manual applies to models 42HP95  and 50HP95  Before you start reading  check the model number on the back of your TV    e Instructions in this manual are based on using the remote control  You also can use the controls on the TV side panel if they have  the same name as those referred to on the remote control   MENU on the side panel functions as ENTER when a menu is on   screen or when the TV Guide On Screen    system is open     e The side panel and back panel provide terminals for connecting other equipment to your TV  See page 10 for side panel details   See page 11 for back panel details  See pages 13 27 for instructions on connecting other devices to your TV       Please read all safety and operating instructions in this manual carefully  and keep this manual for future reference           Features of your new TV       The following are just a few of the many exciting features of your new Toshiba widescreen  integrate
38.  Menu Language English       Home CH Setup     a  Navigate  O  Select  Ii  Back Exit    4  Press EXIT to close the Preferences menu           Configuring the antenna input  sources       To configure the ANT 1 and ANT 2 input sources     1  Press MENU and open  the Setup menu     2  Highlight Installation Installation  and press ENTER   A Seer Tre   new set of Installation PC Settings  k 7 HDMI Audio Auto  menu icons will appear Slide Show Interval 2 Sec    on screen  as shown in y AVHD Skip Time 15 min    step 3 below      3  Open the Terrestrial menu  highlight Input Configuration   and press ENTER     Note  The Terrestrial menu may not be accessible  items will  be    grayed out     in some instances  for example  if a cable  box is connected to the ANT 1 input or if one of the VIDEO  modes is the current input during TV Guide On Screen     setup      Input Configuration  Channel Program  Channel Add Delete  Signal Meter        a  Navigate  6  Select   H Back Exit    4  Press  lt  or P to select the input source  Cable or Antenna   for the ANT 1 input on the TV     Note  If a cable box is connected to the ANT 1 input during  TV Guide On Screen    setup  the entire Terrestrial menu will  not be accessible  including the input source for ANT 1  which  will automatically display    Cable Box        5  Press W and then  lt  or P to select the input source  Cable  or antenna  for the ANT 2 input on the TY  if applicable  If  you have not connected anything to ANT 2  skip this s
39.  OUT     Standard composite video and analog audio  outputs for connecting a VCR for editing and dubbing  See  page 19 for details        VARIABLE AUDIO OUT     Standard analog audio outputs  for connecting an analog amplifier with external speakers   See page 21         TheaterNet     IR  OUT     For controlling infrared remote   controlled devices through the TV  You can connect up to  two devices with either one of the enclosed IR blaster cables   and then control the devices using the TV   s IR pass through  or TheaterNet     on screen device control  features  See  pages 22 and 47        HDMI AUDIO IN     For use when connecting a DVI device  with analog audio output to the HDMI input  See page 20   Also see item 8 below     HDMI  the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or    registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC   CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories  Inc     BE                   sere    1S p   TE    g     amp     DIGITAL   AUDIOOUT              2i i      Ce     CABLE          The power cord supplied with this product is to be used in United States and Canada only  If this product is  used in another country  use a power cord which confirms to the law or regulations of that country   Do not remove the noise filter from the power cord  The noise filter is to reduce the interference in image or  sound of other electronic equipment       ANT 1  CABLE  IN and ANT 2 IN     Two inputs that  support analog  NTSC  and dig
40.  SCHEDULE screenami ar a aisle T 63  Record   feat  res ynne nenian TAAS 63  Remind features      0 65  SEFUPiscteen    ssceissecscess RRL  Change system settings     67  Change channel display    secseeseesessesseseeeseeeees 67  Change default options       csecssesseeeseseeeesenes 68  Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features            69  Selecting the video input source to view 69  Labeling the video input sources       70  Tuning channels    71  Using the Channel Browser         ceessessessessseseesessees 71  Tuning your favorite channels     s  sssssssssseessssresssseeenesee 73  Tuning to the next programmed channel               73  Tuning to a specific channel  programmed or  unprogrammed         ssssssssrssssssssstrstssssssrrstessssrsrrsessss 73  Switching between two channels using  Channel Return   s sessesesseseosessesessesessesesseseesesseseseosees 73  Switching between two channels using  Sur flock  akin eeniee t a AAT Aa 73  Selecting the picture size      sss ssssssssssessssseessssrtsssssresssrrrsseene 74     Continued on next page     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_005 007_4250HP95 6  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 05 PM    Con ten ts  Continued from previous page           Scrolling the TheaterWide   picture      ceceeseseseeeeeenees 76  Using the auto aspect ratio feature    eeessessesesseseseeneees 76  Selecting the cinema mode  480i signals only    Mey PE  Using the POP features oc cessesseesesteeeeee w
41.  Settings   HDMI Audio Auto   Slide Show Interval 2 Sec  y AVHD Skip Time 15 min     Gp Navigate     select GE Back EI Exit    4  Open the Devices menu  highlight TheaterNet Devices   and then press ENTER     a    IEEE1394 Devices  TheaterNet Devices           SyNavigate     Select EL Back EI Exit       5  The TheaterNet Setup menu opens                 TheaterNet Setup   Input Video 1 Select device  Type Cable type  brand   Bed G   Inst and IR code   ran eneral Instrum    from owners  IR List  lt  0000 BB ancen  IR Code 0000 Test   Reset Done    Using the  lt P buttons  select the Input the device is  connected to     Note  When the input is changed  all unsaved settings will be  lost     6  Press V and then  lt P to select the device Type   7  Press V and then  gt  to select the device Brand   Note  When selecting a new brand  the IR code will be set to 0   8  Press V and then  lt P to select the device   s IR code   9  If the desired IR code is found  skip to step 10     If the desired IR code is not in the list  press W and use the  Channel Number buttons to enter the device IR code   Note  You can find the IR code for your device in the on     screen list or in the TheaterNet device code table on pages  49 5      10  Highlight Test and press ENTER to test whether the device  responds to the code  If the device does not respond to the  code  repeat steps 8 and 9 using another code for the same  device     When done  highlight Done and press ENTER or choose a  different In
42.  TV Guide On Screen    system       Follow these instructions to set up the TV Guide On Screen     system so it can receive current program data for your area     Note  If you move the TV to a different ZIP postal code  you will  need to perform the TV Guide On Screen    Setup process to  recontigure your TV Guide On Screen    system     If you have not already connected your antenna  cable box   and or recording device  see Chapter 2 for connection  instructions     Note  You must connect a VCR or an IEEE1394 compatible  recording device to use the TV Guide On Screen    system s  one touch recording feature  It is recommended that you  connect your devices according to the connection instructions  in Chapter 2        The unauthorized recording  use  distribution  or revision of  television programs  videotapes  DVDs  and other materials is  prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and  other countries  and may subject you to civil and criminal liability              1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu     2  Highlight Installation and then press ENTER to open the  Installation menus   A new set of menu icons will appear  on screen  as shown in step 3 below      3  Open the TV Guide On Screen    Setup menu  highlight  Start  and then press ENTER     Setup TV Guide On Screen Setup  Installation Start  Sleep Timer  On Off Timer  PC Settings  HDMI Audio Auto  Slide Show Interval 2 Sec  v AVHD Skip Time 15 min       Gy Navigate     Select GL Back  UN Exit   Gy N
43.  Text Type Auto   Done and Caption Text Edge Auto   press Caption Text Color Auto  ENTER  To Background Color Auto   revert to the Reset Done   factory    defaults  highlight Reset and press ENTER        Caption Size Auto  Small  Standard  Large    Caption Text Type   Auto  Default  Mono w  Serif  Prof  w  Serif     Mono w o Serif  Prop w o Serif  Casual   Cursive  Small Capitals          Caption Text Edge   Auto  None  Raised  Depressed  Uniform   Left Drop Shadow  Right Drop shadow    Caption Text Color   Auto  Black  White  Red  Green  Blue   Yellow  Magenta  Cyan    Background Color   Auto  Black  White  Red  Green  Blue   Yellow  Magenta  Cyan                      NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON  PLASMA DISPLAY  Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma display for    extended periods of time  Fixed  non moving  images  including   but not limited to  PIP POP windows  closed captions  video game    patterns  TV station logos  stock tickers  and websites  and  special formats that do not use the entire screen  can become  permanently ingrained in the Plasma display and cause subtle   but permanent  ghost images  This type of damage is NOT  COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY  See pages 4 and 5 for  details     84 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_081 088_4250HP95 84  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM          Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Using the closed caption mode  continued        Digital closed
44.  VCR to the appropriate line input  refer to your  VCR owner   s manual for details   and then turn OFF the  VCR    4  See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  On Screen    system     5  See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  On Screen    system           17    05 9 12  10 05 PM    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream    component video  and a VCR       Your TV has ColorStream    component video  inputs   You will need     gt  one signal splitter    gt  three coaxial cables     gt  two sets of standard A V cables      For better picture performance  if your VCR has S video  use an  S video cable  plus the audio cables  instead of the standard  video cable  However  do not connect both types of video cables  to VIDEO 1  or VIDEO 2  at the same time or the picture  performance will be unacceptable       Ifyou have a mono VCR  connect L MONO on the TV   VIDEO 1  to your VCR s audio out terminal using the white  audio cable only      gt  one pair of standard audio cables   gt  one set of component video cables      You can connect the component video cables  plus audio  cables  from the DVD player to either set of ColorStream  terminals on the TV  HD 1 or HD 2   The ColorStream HD 1  and HD 2 terminals can be used with Progressive  480p   720p  and Interlaced  480i  10801  scan systems  A 1080   signal will provide the best picture performance        fyour DVD player does not have component video  see page  17  If you
45.  a particular device  you  can cycle the remote control through the available codes for that  device mode and sample the functions to find the code that  operates the target device  The keys available to be sampled   provided they are applicable to that mode  are POWER  1   VOL A  CH A  and PLAY  Invalid keys will be ignored while in  program mode     To cycle through each available device code and sample its  functions   1  Press MODE to select the mode you want to set up     2  While holding down RECALL  press 8     5     0     0  The  remote control will enter program mode     3  Point the remote control at the target device and press  POWER  or other function buttons that are available to be  sampled     4  If the device responds to the remote control     Press RECALL to store the device code  The mode  indicator will blink twice and the remote control will exit  the program mode     If the device does not respond to the remote control     Press A  and then press POWER  Repeat this step until  the device responds to the remote control  and then press    RECALL     Note  When a search cycle is completed  the mode  indicator will blink three times  The remote control will  begin to cycle through the available codes again  If no  key is pressed within 10 seconds while programming  the  remote control will exit the program mode and return to  the previous code      DOBLAT POWER      IVAPIR    ao    S AUDION Numbers        AUDIO2    MODE    ACTION  CE  M  wO TE eee          Si
46.  all gas based  plasma displays  the display of this Plasma TV may be  susceptible to permanent ghost images  also known as  phosphor burn in  under certain circumstances  Certain  operating conditions may accelerate the potential for  phosphor burn in  including but not limited to the  following    e Displaying fixed  non moving  images  including but  not limited to PIP POP windows  closed captions  video  game patterns  TV station logos  stock tickers  and  websites     e Displaying special formats that do not use the entire  screen  including but not limited to widescreen or  letterbox format media viewed on a 4 3 aspect ratio  display  with gray or black bars at the top and bottom of  the screen  and 4 3 aspect ratio format media viewed on  a widescreen 16 9 aspect ratio display  with gray or  black bars on the left and right sides of the screen      To minimize the potential for the occurrence of phosphor   burn in  Toshiba recommends the following    e Display a moving image on the display of your Plasma  TV whenever possible    e Always turn off the power of your Plasma TV when you  are finished using it    e Reduce the Brightness and Contrast levels as much as  possible without impairing image quality    e Enable the Long Life settings  see page 94       Try to display images that have many colors and color  gradations  i e   photographic or photo realistic images       Try to display images that have minimal contrast  between light and dark areas  e g   avoid white 
47.  and Sort By  as  described below     View As  Press  lt P to choose between the following     e List   Displays every recorded episode for a show  see  example in Screen B  at right    Note  In List view  highlight an episode to display an Info  Box with show information  Press MENU to display the  Episode Options panel menu  see    Episode Options  panel menu    on page 59      e Group   Displays recorded shows without listing every  recorded episode  see example in Screen A  at right    Note  In Group view  highlight a show and press ENTER    to view all recorded episodes  Press ENTER again to  collapse the episode list        Sort By  Press 4 and P to choose between the following    e Title   Displays recorded shows in alphabetical order  see  example in Screen A  at right     e Date   Displays recorded shows by date and time  with  most recent first  see example in Screen B  at right      3  When finished  press ENTER to highlight DONE  and  then press ENTER again to close the panel menu and  display the recordings with the selected options        To view a recording  you can do one of the following     e Highlight an episode and press ENTER to view it now  The  episode either starts from the beginning or from where it  was last stopped  if viewed previously     e Highlight an episode and press MENU to display the  Episode Options panel menu  with the following options       GO TO SERVICE BAR  Closes the menu  changes no   information  and returns to the Service Bar     
48.  and press ENTER to close the  menu  change no information  and return to the  highlighted show   Note  You can change the default values of the Record Options  panel menu fields  See    Change default options    on page 68     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  63     01E_059 064_4250HP95 63  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 08 PM         Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       TV Guide On Screen    Services  continued        Record features  continued     3  Manually set a show to Record  1  Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar  and press  MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu   2  Highlight NEW MANUAL RECORDING and press  ENTER to display the Record Options panel menu     Press AVP to move through the options   Press the Number buttons or AVP to change the    information  as necessary     3  Enter the information in the panel menu fields  You will  need to set the start and end time for the recording  For  details  see    Set a show to Record from a panel menu    on  the previous page    Note  When setting a Manual Recording  the frequency  option    Daily    is available instead of    Regularly     See    Record  icons     below right  for a description of Record icons     4  When finished entering the information in the fields   press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING   and press ENTER again to close the menu    A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the  show tile  
49.  ave  Oo                                          ep                       THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT    AS IS    AND  ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT  LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT  SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR  CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO   PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE   DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED  AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT  LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE   ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN IF  ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE  This product includes  cryptographic software written by Eric Young  eay cryptsoft com   This  product includes software written by Tim Hudson  tjh cryptsoft com      Copyright    1995 1998 Eric Young  eay cryptsoft com   All Rights reserved   This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young   eay cryptsoft com   The implementation was written so as to conform with  Netscapes SSL  This library is free for commercial and non commercial use  so long as the following conditions are adhered to  The following conditions  apply to all code found in this distribution  be it the RC4  RSA  Ihash  DES   etc   code  not just the SSL code  The SSL documentation in
50.  been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the Plasma Television or             parts caused by fires  misuse  accident  Acts of God  such as lightning  or fluctuations in electric power   improper installation  improper  maintenance  or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP  use  or malfunction through simultaneous use of this Plasma Television and  connected equipment  or to units that have been modified or had the  serial number removed  altered  defaced  or rendered illegible                                                           How to Obtain Warranty Service    If  after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and reviewing  the section entitled    Troubleshooting     you find that service is needed      1  To find the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station  visit TACP   s  website at www tacp toshiba com service or contact TACP   s  Consumer Solution Center toll free at 1 800 631 3811     2  You must present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to  the TACP Authorized Service Station                          For additional information  visit TACP   s website   www tacp toshiba com    ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE  U S A   INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE   ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED  WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE  WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY  WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U S A  AS  HEREBY LIM
51.  captions    You can use the Digital CC Audio selector to select digital  closed caption services  if available   which will temporarily  override closed captions for digital channels only    When such services are not available  the Digital CC Audio  selector presents a default list of services  If the selected service is  not available  the next best service will be used instead     To select digital closed captions   1  Press MENU and open the Applications menu   2  Highlight Digital CC Audio Selector and press ENTER     TV Guide On Screen  Audio Player   Picture Viewer   Digital CC Audio Selector  CableCARD        a  Navigate O  Select Back Exit    3  Press A or W to select Closed Caption  and then press or  P to select the desired service     Audio cc1  Closed Caption  lt  Service 1  gt   Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved    01E_081 088_4250HP95 85 05 9 12  10 09 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    35    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Adjusting the audio       Muting the sound    Press MUTE to partially reduce  1 2 Mute  or turn off  Mute   the sound  Each time you press MUTE  the mute mode will  change in the following order     es 1 2 Mute     Mute  gt  Volume  gt         If the closed caption mode is set to Off when you select     MUTE    mode  the closed caption feature is automatically  activated  To mute the audio without automatically activating  the closed caption feature  use the VOL W button to set the  volume to 0  S
52.  characters on black backgrounds       Try to avoid displaying images that have few colors and   or that have distinct  sharply defined borders between  colors     About the Sticking Image Protection feature   This TV contains a    Sticking Image Protection    feature that  automatically starts to decrease the picture brightness in  small increments when a fixed  non moving  image is  displayed on screen for an extended period of time  This  feature helps to reduce and delay the potential for phosphor  burn in  The time delay and rate of decreasing picture  brightness depend on the brightness of the displayed image     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  5     01E_005 007_4250HP95 5  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 05 PM    Contents    Important Safety Information          cscesssseesenenseeneneeeees 2 4  FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement   P  rt 15  esi sciccatic cates sselacacieciecctastutceech capecstecsitocscdnadsunsdavcvnicnecs 5  Important notes about your Plasma TV         ssssssssesseneeees 5  Chapter 1  Introduction          c csssssseesseseneeeesenseeeneneneeeeneeees 8  Welcome to Toshiba        ccsccsssssssssessescscesssssesecessenssesesensasese 8  Features of your mew TV mirerien a 8    Overview of steps for installing  setting up  and  USING your new TV       scscsccssecssserecsscsesecereccsceesscerecescees 9            Chapter 2  Connecting your TV          ssssccseeseesneneen   10  TV front and side pa
53.  computer  Copyright  protection requirements may also prohibit or  limit connectivity  See page 20 for details  about the HDMI input  See pages 23 25 for  details about the  EEE1394 ports     05 9 12  10 05 PM       Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       About the connection illustrations       You can connect different types and brands of devices to your TV in several different configurations  The connection illustrations in  this manual are representative of typical device connections only  The input output terminals on your devices may differ from those  illustrated herein  For details on connecting and using your specific devices  refer to each device   s owner   s manual        Connecting a digital CableCARD          This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic  digital  basic  and digital premium cable television programming by  direct connection to a cable system providing such  programming    A security card  such as a digital CableCARD      provided by  your cable operator  is required to view encrypted digital  programming    Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services  such as  video on demand  a cable operator   s enhanced program guide   and data enhanced television services  will not work with the  use of a CableCARD    and may require the use of a separate set   top box from your cable operator     For more information  call your local cable operator   You will need    gt  one digital CableCARD     contact your cable operator      gt  
54.  death  or serious damage to the TV     17    DANGER  RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL          18  Never place items such as vases  aquariums  or candles  on top of the TV        Sturdy tie   as short as possible     19  Always place the  TV on the floor or  a sturdy  level   stable surface that  can support the  weight of the unit   Use a sturdy tie  between the TV   s  rear hook and the  rear wall  pillar  etc   to secure the TV  If you use a TV  stand  fix the TV by using the attached band        TV side TV top       20  Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing liquid  or place items such as vases  aquariums  any other item  filled with liquid  or candles on top of the TV        21  Never block or cover the slots  or openings in the TV cabinet  back  bottom  and sides   Never place the TV        e on a bed  sofa  rug  or similar  surface           e too close to drapes  curtains   or walls  or    e in a confined space such as a bookcase  built in cabinet   or any other place with poor ventilation    The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV from   overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the   TV  Leave a space of at least 4 inches around the TV        22  Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power  cord  and never place the TV where the power cord is  subject to wear or abuse        23  Never overload wall outlets and extension cords        24  Always operate the TV with  a 120V AC  60Hz power source  only           CAUTION  To re
55.  down mixed PCM  pulse code  modulation  signal for use with an external Dolby Digital  decoder or other external audio system with optical audio input   You will need      gt  one optical audio cable  Use an optical audio cable that has TV back panel    the larger    TosLink    connector and not the smaller         mini optical    connector                   To control the audio   Turn on the TV and the digital audio device    ti lt CtsCS e  Press MENU on the TV   s remote control and open the AUDIO    menu   Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER   In the Optical Output Format field  select either Dolby Digital    or PCM  depending on your  device  see    Selecting the       DIGITAL     lt n  AUDIO  AUDIOOUT        T          optical audio output format      EE Note   on page 88   Saad A SA   Some audio systems may not be compatible with Dolby Digital bitstream  Audio Setup signals  Older audio systems that are not compatible with standard    optical out signals may not work properly  creating a high noise level that    may damage speakers or headphones  THIS DAMAGE IS NOT    COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY     MTS Stereo   Language English   The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs signals only when receiving   Speakers On digital broadcasts with the TV in single window mode    Optical Output Format  DO ID VELOC ans   The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal may not output some digital audio  Reset Done sources because of copy restrictions     Turn off the TV   s built in speakers in the same
56.  each time slot    A  Yes  In LISTINGS  highlight the station for which you  want to look ahead and use the Channel Number buttons  on the remote control to enter    24     In the resulting menu   press W two times to scroll down to select the HOURS  AHEAD option  and then press ENTER  You also can use  the SKIP button on the remote control     30  Q  Why can   t I record a show  All I get is snow or a blue    screen   A  There are several possibilities  without a cable box    a  The recording unit was not connected or set up correctly     b  The incorrect channel lineup was selected  Press TV  GUIDE and then P to highlight SETUP  Press W to  highlight    Change system settings     and then press  ENTER  Follow the on screen prompts to select the correct  channel lineup     31  Q  Why wont my VCR change channels and why does it  change to the wrong channel    A  There are two possibilities  with a cable box     a  The VCR is not set on the correct output channel  Set the  VCR to 03  04  or whichever output channel is set by your  cable system    b  The VCR and or cable box are hooked up incorrectly   Refer to your VCR owner   s manual or contact your Cable  TV company for proper wiring procedures        32  Q  Is Help available in the TV Guide On Screen    system   If so  how do I find it     A  Yes  Highlight any of the five main Services  Listings   Schedule  Recordings  Setup  Search  and press INFO on  the remote control  An expanded Info Box displays  additional help inf
57.  from    10 to  20     Theater Settings    Picture Size TheaterWide 3  Picture Scroll O  Cinema Mode Film  Auto Aspect Ratio On   Reset Done    7  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER     NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE  EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY    Avoid displaying stationary images on your  Plasma display for extended periods of  time  Fixed  non moving  images   including  but not limited to  PIP POP  windows  closed captions  video game  patterns  TV station logos  stock tickers   and websites  and special formats that do  not use the entire screen  can become  permanently ingrained in the Plasma  display and cause subtle  but permanent   ghost images  This type of damage is  NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY   See pages 4 and 5 for details           Using the auto aspect ratio feature       When the auto aspect ratio feature is set to On  the picture size   is automatically selected when one of the following input   sources is received    e A 480i signal from the VIDEO 1  VIDEO 2  VIDEO 3   ColorStream HD 1  or ColorStream HD 2 input     e A 1080i  480i  480p  or 720p signal from the HDMI input        Automatic aspect size   automatically selected  when Auto Aspect is On     Aspect ratio  of signal source                4 3 normal Natural  with sidebars   4 3 letter box TheaterWide 2  16 9 full Full  Not defined    User selected picture size     no ID 1 data or   see pages 74 75     HDMI aspe
58.  gt  one set of component video cables  if your satellite receiver  does not have component video  connect the standard A V  cables only      gt  one pair of standard audio cables   gt  three sets of standard A V cables      For better picture performance  if your satellite receiver and VCR  have S video  connect S video cables  plus the audio cables   instead of the standard video cables  Do not connect both types of  video cables to VIDEO 1  or VIDEO 2  at the same time or the  picture performance will be unacceptable       Ifyou have a mono VCR  connect L MONO on the TV  VIDEO 1   to your VCR s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only     L  To view satellite programs using the component video  connections     Select the ColorStream HD 1 video input source on the  TV      L  To view satellite programs using the standard  video connections or to record satellite programs   Turn on all three devices  Set the VCR to the appropriate    line input  refer to your VCR owner   s manual for details    Select the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV      E  To view the VCR or view and record antenna channels     Turn ON the VCR  Tune the VCR to the channel you want  to watch  Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the  TV       To select the video input source  press INPUT on the remote control   see page 69   To program the TV remote control to operate other  devices  see Chapter 3        The unauthorized recording  use  distribution  or revision of television  program
59.  of the United States and other countries  and may subject  you to civil and criminal liability              64 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_059 064_4250HP95 64  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM       Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       TV Guide On Screen    Services  continued        Remind features    You can set a Reminder to perform the following functions     Automatically turn on the TV  if off  at the scheduled  reminder time  and tune the TV to the channel of the show  for which you set the reminder    Automatically tune the TV  at the scheduled reminder time   to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder   Display an on screen notification banner  reminding you that  the show is about to start   from which you can choose to  tune the TV to the show   s channel or cancel the reminder     You can set a show reminder  or edit the reminder settings for a  show  in LISTINGS  SEARCH  and SCHEDULE  There are  two ways to set a show reminder  as described below     1  Seta show Reminder from a panel menu    1  Highlight a show and press MENU to display the  Episode Options panel menu     2  Highlight SET REMINDER and press ENTER to  display the Remind Options panel menu       Poj itto dPupp  uJ toari     tong Yonu seret ah Puppy Your Secret Valent     temale puppy on Vola 3 press a female puppy on Valent  aay   f  7 T    it  pote Grey Delite  Kath Soucie  TV    
60.  operating instructions in this manual and reviewing   the section entitled    Troubleshooting     you find that service is needed     1  To find the nearest TCL Authorized Service Depot  visit TCL   s website at  www toshiba ca     2  You must present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to  the TCL Authorized Service Depot                    For additional information  visit TCL   s website   www toshiba ca    ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF  CANADA  INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE   ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED  WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE  WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY  WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF CANADA  AS HEREBY LIMITED  THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE  AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES  GUARANTEES   AGREEMENTS  AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TCL WITH RESPECT  TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS  IN NO EVENT  SHALL TCL BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL  DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  LOST PROFITS   BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF  RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY USE  MISUSE  OR INABILITY TO USE  THIS PLASMA TELEVISION      No person  agent  distributor  dealer  or company is authorized to change   modify  or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever   The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any  obligation of TCL arising under the warranty or under any law o
61.  panel menu with options for the currently  highlighted program or tile  including setting recordings and reminders     e To access another Service screen   1  Press A to highlight the Service Bar     2  Press or P to highlight a different Service  LISTINGS  SEARCH   SETUP SCHEDULE  or RECORDINGS      3  Press W to use that Service   Note  Helpful information about each Service appears in the Info Box     TV Guide On Screen    remote control functions    ces KOEI MI uci cs      A e LE  ASC rN          Channel Logo Info  Box    r cSParimesScenen           Record  amp     Channel Ad Remind Icons    Note      The TV Guide On Screen    menus shown in this manual are  for illustration purposes only  The channels  programs  and  TV Guide On Screen    information as illustrated may not be  available in your area  The options and features as illustrated  are subject to change when updates are downloaded from the  TV Guide On Screen    service to your TV      The TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide supports  cable ready  cable box  and digital cable services  as well as  over the air broadcasts  It does not provide listings for satellite  services        BUTTON FUNCTION    Numbers       TV GUIDE  listing     the Video Window     When watching TV  enters the TV Guide On Screen    system and highlights the current show    When in the TV Guide On Screen    system  returns to watching TV and displays the show in    r    lt          gt  AVD    S AUDIOL    6 AUDIO2       Numbers
62.  reduce visible interference in your TV picture  This may be  useful when receiving a broadcast with a weak signal  especially  a Cable channel  or playing a noisy video cassette or disc   To select CableClear DNR preferences    1  Press MENU and open the Video menu    2  Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER    3  Press W to highlight the CableClear DNR field  and then    press  lt 4 or P to make a selection        Picture Settings  Advanced Picture Settings  Theater Settings    Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1  Dynamic Contrast On  MPEG Noise Reduction Low  CableClear  lt  Auto  gt   Color Temperature Cool  Reset Done  Note       For the current inputs Antenna  Video 1  Video 2  or Video 3   the menu will display the text    CableClear     If the signal is  analog  the available selections are Off  Low  Middle  High   and Auto  If the signal is digital  the menu will display the text     CableClear    and will be    grayed out    with    Off    selected     e For the current inputs ColorStream HD1  ColorStream HD2   or HDMI  the menu will display the text    DNR     If the video  resolution is 480i  the available selections are Off  Low   Middle  High  and Auto  If the video resolution is 10801  the  available selections are Off Low  and High  If the video  resolution is anything other than 480i or 1080i  the menu will  display the text    DNR    and will be    grayed out    with    Off     selected     4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENT
63.  set to Record overlaps with any part of another  show previously set to Record    e A show set to Record overlaps with a show previously set to  auto tune   For auto tune details  see    Remind features    on  page 65     Select one of these options    e Record Anyway   This show will override an existing show   set to Record or auto tune       Don t Record This Show   Cancels the Recording     RECORDING CONFLICT   Sei       Regis  amp  Kelly            glBQQCd anyway 4       Record icons    Following is a description of the Record icons that will appear  on the tile for a show set to Record     e Record Once J     Records the show one time       Record Regularly A     Records the show every time the    show airs on the same channel and starts at the same time     e Record Weekly Ww    Records the show every time the show  airs on the same day of the week and on the same channel   and starts at the same time     e Record Daily A     Records on the same channel and at the  same start time every weekday  Monday through Friday      Note  This icon displays for manual recordings only     e Record Suspend 9     Recording is Suspended due to a    schedule conflict  show remains in Schedule      e Record Off 4    Keeps the Recording in the Schedule list    but will not record this show until the frequency is changed        The unauthorized recording  use  distribution  or revision of television  programs  videotapes  DVDs  and other materials is prohibited under the  Copyright Laws
64.  starting in the future  Button date  02 20 fos     When a panel menu appears  the highlighted tile changes color to start 01 130 Gam  gt     indicate that the panel menu relates to the tile  Entry Box      00      Press INFO to display help for the current panel menu  So   l chanel 6  Press A and W to move among the options  Odometer  Press and P to move to adjacent options or  if the highlight is on a input Cable Input  gt   odometer  to change the odometer choice  recorder 4 VCR    To move the highlight to the default command button  press ENTER frequen one  gt     from an odometer or entry box   To execute the action and close the panel menu  highlight the i    command button and press ENTER     To cancel any changes and close the panel menu        press MENU  or       highlight Cancel and press ENTER    Ifa panel menu contains more options than can be displayed in one  panel  the word    more    appears at the bottom of the menu  To access    the additional options  either scroll down using the W button or the  PAGE UP DOWN  CH AY  button     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  57     01E_055 058_4250HP95 57 05 9 12  10 08 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       Navigating the TV Guide On Screen    system  continued        Info Box    e An Info Box contains information about a show  Service  or Panel Ad  or  provides general help  for example  for a panel menu      In
65.  the TV while  using the memory card  Doing so may result in loss of data and   or damage to the memory card and or TV  SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT  COVERED BY YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY      Itis recommended that you back up your memory card data  Toshiba  is not liable for any damage caused by the use of any memory card  with this TV  Toshiba will not compensate for any lost data or  recording s  caused by the use of such cards      For instructions on using your digital camera  refer to the owner s  manual for your camera      For instructions on using your memory card  refer to the owner s  manual for your memory card      Failure to take proper care of a memory card may prevent display of  pictures or playback of MP3 files from the card or result in damage to  the memory card and or TV  SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY  YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY  See    Memory card care and  handling    on page 92      The technical criteria set out in this owner s manual are meant as a  guide only    e Please be advised that you must obtain permission from the  applicable copyright owners to download copyrighted content   including music files  in any format  including the MP3 format  prior to  the downloading thereof Toshiba has no right to grant and does not  grant permission to download any copyrighted content     Memory card specifications    E Supported memory card types       Sm Memory Card  ver  1 0       MMC  MultiMediaCard          Memory Stick     Pro       xD Picture Card     16MB 512MB       Com
66.  to a channel in Browse mode  To tune to a channel in Select mode   CI Ci   1  While watching TV  press  lt       or  gt   to open the 1  While watching TV  press  lt       or  gt   to open the  channel browser banner and surf back to a previous channel channel browser banner and surf back to a previous channel  or forward to the next channel in the channel history  or forward to the next channel in the channel history   In Browse mode  when you stop on a channel number in In Select mode  when you stop on a channel number in  the browser banner  it will be highlighted with a yellow the browser banner  it will be highlighted with a yellow  outline and the TV will automatically tune to the channel  background but the TV will not automatically tune to the   2  Press EXIT to close the channel browser banner  channel     2  Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel     chaso geele 3  Press EXIT to close the channel browser banner          Browse Mode ANT 1 CABL  Ch 102 1 1080i  ch3       he  f i 3 2 102 1 Hold HOME key  In Browse mode  the highlighted channel number is outlined me ae ener 3 sec to program  in yellow and the channel will be tuned to automatically     Select Mode  ANT 1  CABL  Ch 102 1 1080i Ech   Note  The channel browser close automatically if you do not In Select mode  the highlighted channel number has a  make a selection within 60 seconds  yellow background  Press ENTER to tune to the channel   Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reser
67.  to which the receiver is connected       Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician  for help     CAUTION  Changes or modifications to this equipment not  expressly approved by Toshiba could void the user s authority to  operate this equipment        Important notes about your Plasma TV    The following symptoms are not signs of malfunction   but rather technical limitations of plasma TV  technology     1  The display of this Plasma TV radiates infrared rays  It may  affect other infrared communication equipment under  certain operating conditions     2  Under certain conditions  the display of this Plasma TV  may cause interference with the audio and or video of  certain types of electronic equipment that easily receive  electromagnetic waves  e g   AM radios and video  equipment   In particular  the display of this Plasma TV  may affect certain types of electronic equipment that are  located beyond the area where the Plasma TV is being  used     3  The display panel of this Plasma TV is manufactured using  an extremely high level of precision technology  However   occasionally some parts of the screen may be missing  picture elements and or have luminous spots     4  You can enjoy playing video games on this Plasma TV   However  certain video games that utilize so called    light  gun    joysticks for shooting at on screen targets may not  work with this Plasma TV     5  Possible Adverse Effects on Plasma Display    Like all phosphor based display devices and
68.  will  not be available     Switching between two channels using  SurfLock       The SurfLock    feature temporarily    memorizes    one channel  in the CH RTN button  so you can return to that channel  quickly from any other channel by pressing CH RTN  To  memorize a channel in the CH RTN button     1  Select the channel you want to program into the CH RTN  button     2  Press and hold CH RTN for about 2 seconds until the  message    Channel Memorized    appears on the screen  The  channel has been programmed into the CH RTN button     3  You can then change channels repeatedly  and when you  press CH RIN  the memorized channel will be selected     Press CH RTN  The memorized channel will be selected  The  TV will return to the memorized channel one time only  Once  you press CH RTN and then change channels again  the CH  RTN button memory will be cleared and the button will  function as Channel Return  by switching back and forth  between the last two channels that were selected       000  Jooo    peron  oO      menu  5 Co ey            amp  Qus  amp  The  on    tA KO EY          Channel Numbers         dash        CHANNEL AV       Lard  S    CH RTN    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  73     01E_069 080_4250HP95 73  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Selecting the picture size       You can view many program formats in a variety of picture  sizes   Natural  TheaterWide 1  TheaterW
69.  with ELA 775 or AV C IEEE1394  control standards  described below      The TV cannot control IEEE1394 devices that use any other  control standards         EIA 775 digital control allows tuning devices  such as  Cable boxes  to send simple graphics  however  this  standard does not allow the TV to control the Cable box  through IEEE1394         AVIC  audio video control  provides basic control  such  as power  play  stop rewind  fast forward  pause  and  record   as applicable to the specific device     Using TheaterNet    on screen device  control    You can use the TheaterNet feature to control some IEEE1394  devices using on screen control icons  See page 47 for details on  setting up and using the TheaterNet feature     Note  lf the TheaterNet feature does not control your   EEE1394 device  you can either use the device   s remote  control or try using IR pass through with the TV s remote  control  page 22      Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  23     01E_013 027_4250HP95 23  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 06 PM    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting IEEE1394 video devices  continued        Connecting an AVHD  external hard  drive  or D VHS digital recorder    You can connect an IEEE1394 compatible D VHS or AVHD   audio video hard drive  digital recorder  such as Toshiba s  Symbio    AVHD Recorder  to record high definition and  standard definition material from either tuner and control live  TV  pause  rewind  etc
70.  your new TV     Note   f you sell or transfer this television to a third party  be sure  to reset the PIN code as described on page 97 under the heading        If you cannot remember your PIN code           05 9 12  10 05 PM       2  Connecting your TV       TV front and side panel controls and connections       TV Front       VIDEO 3 IN    Left side panel         Right side panel          E                                                             asol   if fam   L CHANNEL av         j m e    ave  lt             H   Headphone jack    Gr  enand kile         VOLUME  gt  4     Red LEDs    Sensor MENU es   ENTER         maa   EXIT    TVVIDEO     GUIDE       on screen        Memory card slots         Remote sensor  behind the screen      Point the remote  control toward this remote sensor  See    Remote control  effective range    on page 29       Green and Red LEDs    When the green LED lights solid  not blinking   it indicates  that recording is in progress    When the red LED lights solid  not blinking   it indicates  that the TV power cord is plugged in       POWER     Press to turn the TV on and off   Note  If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote  control or TV side panel and you cannot turn off the TV  press and  hold the POWER button on the TV side panel for 5 or more seconds  to reset the TV       TV VIDEO     Repeatedly press to change the source you are  viewing  ANT 1  ANT 2  VIDEO 1  VIDEO 2  VIDEO 3   HDMI  ColorStream HD1  ColorStream HD2  PC    
71. 0      cseecseecseecsesesseesseecetesstecstecstesstecstecstecsueesseesseess 75  PICTURE VICWER  zeien r R EN a 89  Problems With TV scccosscceccceecodeccenscdcccesccuseiveectsesdectSiedanesucbonecteces 101 103  R  RECALL  DUON miini ana SA eee 86  Remote control   Battery installation           cccsscssecssessesssssssssesesesssecstesseesseecstessatesseesess 30  Device COde tablei iii 35  36  EffECTIVE FANGE sann a eaa 29  Functional key chart       31  32  Learning about the buttons       28  29  Operational feature reset          ecccceescccceesscsteessettessseetessetteeeeeees 34  Programming zone a A 33  Searching and sampling the code 2    sess  33  Volume lock feature   0    eecsecsssessseessescsessssecssecstecstessesseesseeseesatesess 34  Restore TV factory defaults            eccseccsesessessstesesssssesseesstesetesseesseeesees 54  Reverse sii eda e naaie eaea N aeaii iiia N 95                  S  Safety  care  installation  and service        seeceecseecseeeseeeeeteeees 2 4  SAP  SOU ING a chee eatgee taeao a aaeanoa rreri iaaa 86  Satellite receiver Connection       sessessseessstecstecsseeesneesesteeentessnteesneeeee 16  Scrolling the TheaterWide   picture             sccsccscctcsceteesenteeeeeteeees 76  SD  Secure Digital     memory cardS   0    esssesecseescseeseseeeeseeeeeee 89  90  Service         Setup  TV  Setup  TV Guide On Screen    system        sscsescssstesceeesscteeeseees 39  SIDE panelisti Aia 10  38  Sleep TIMER nisinsin ian i a 93  Speakers  ON OFF nii
72. 037  0048   0047  0000  0104   0046  0614  0616  0039  0042  0240  0045  0048  0039  0000  0067  0209   0041  0479  1479  0047  0240  0104   0046  0184  0045  0121   0043  0035  0037  0047   0000  0042  0104     0046  1237  0045  0048  0807  0848  0072  0240  0072  0614  0616    0035  0032  0000  0033  0636  1032  1232   0035  0081  0000  0043  1781   0000   0240   0041   0000  0041  0035  0162  0035  0037  0000  0000   0618  0636  0045  0043  0845  0037  0240   0240   0045   0038   0045   0037   0240   0000   0060  0035  0048  0047  0081  0240   0000  0042  0072  0149  0760   0209  0072  1278   0035  0000  0072   0038   0039  0000  0209    0033  0479  1479    Code   0641   0672  0717  0755   0794  0796  0797   0830  0856  1100   0736   0655  0662   0571       DVD players  cont    Brand Code  Broksonic 0695  DVD2000 0521  Daewoo 0784  Denon 0490  0634  Emerson 0591  Enterprise 0591  Fisher 0670  GE 0522  0717  GPX 0699  0769  Go Video 0715  Gradiente 0651  Greenhill 0717  Harman Kardon 0582  0702  Hitachi 0573  0664  Hiteker 0672  JBL 0702  JVC 0558  0623  0867  KLH 0717  Kenwood 0490  0534  0682   0737  Konka 0711  0719  0720   0721  Koss 0651  Lasonic 0798  Magnavox 0503  0675  Malata 0782  Marantz 0539  Microsoft 0522  Mintek 0717  Mitsubishi 0521  Nesa 0717  Next Base 0826  Norcent 0872  Onkyo 0503  0627  Oritron 0651  Panasonic 0490  0632  1362   1462  1490  Philips 0503  0539  0646  0854  Pioneer 0525  0571  0632  Polk Audio 0539  Princeton 0674  Proscan 0522  RCA 0522 
73. 124  0109  0138  0140  0147   0148  0141  0142  0100  0145  0138  0140  0147   0148  0141  0142   0161  0164  0147  0127  0104  0139  0110  0111   0134  0124  0123  0128  0121  0135   0106  0126  0120  0132  0123  0124  0121   0122  0124  0100  0145   0105  0139  0110   0111  0100  0111  0145       35          VCRs PVRs  cont     Brand Code   PHILCO 0131  0124  0127   0123  0126  0120   0143   PHILIPS 0131  0123  0124   0173   PIONEER 0123   PROSCAN 0145  0100  0123   0124  0131  0146   0101  0102  0133   QUASAR 0121  0122  0123   0124   RADIO SHACK 0133  0124  0105   0136  0109  0140   0127   RCA 0133  0145  0100   0123  0124  0131   0146  0101  0102   0170  0172  0174   0176  0183   REALISTIC 0124  0105  0136   0109  0140  0127   Replay TV 7102   SAMSUNG 0137  0102  0104   0133   SAMTRON 0163   SANSUI 0139  0126  0120  0152   SANYO 0105  0109  0113   SCOTT 0101  0102  0104   0109  0138  0140   0147  0148  0126   SEARS 0105  0106  0107   0108  0100   SHARP 0135  0136  0167   0162   SHINTOM 0117   SIGNATURE 2000 0127  0135   SINGER 0117   SONY 0128  0129  0130   0153  0154  0155   7101   SV2000 0127   SYLVANIA 0131  0123  0124   0127  0178   SYMPHONIC 0127  0168  0177   TASHIRO 0106   TATUNG 0139  0110  0111   TEAC 0139  0110  0127   0111   TECHNICS 0121  0122  0123   0124   TEKNICA 0124  0127  0112   THOMSON 0179  0183   Tivo 7100  7101   TOSHIBA 0101  0146  0166   0160   VECTOR RESEARCH 0111   WARDS 0135  0136  0109   0144  0106   YAMAHA 0105  0139  0110   0111   ZENITH 014
74. 2 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_112 113_4250HP95 112  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 11 PM       Ind ex  continued                  M  Memory Card sos r aeee romeinen idr donari di iein i iiit  Memory Stick    memory Cals       ssseessseessseeecsteecsteeeseeeesteeeseeees  Menu system        cseecseecseecsecsstesseessessstesstecstecseecatesatesatesatesatesstesaesesees  MMC memory Cards            ssscscstscsstsesseeseessettesssetesssenteseeatteeesenees  MP E  MPEG 2 digital video signals       MPEG Noise Reduction    0    cccsssscssssessssescssesssssecssecssneecsnecsssceesaeecssseessse  MTS feature e a ai ra aa aara No i aai ai nidii ideana   MUTE DUTTON ipinya laea etre ye eae  OP  ON OFF IMET segeseecclc ela a a Leased 93  Optical audio cable oon    eeeseecssseeecccseeecsssteeseseeteseentesesenteseeneeeeenteeeeenseees 12  Pariell lOCK i e ee E 100  PG CONNECCION 5  sesceccsescesssesstecsenccseazzaeuetesiaxtssarzaanzcthscesittcasnceestacastecetacieae ies 27  PC setting  Picture adjustments   Color temperature          sseccsesecccsesseccsesssssseesesenteeecenteessateeeeeneeseeneessens 82  Picture Modet le ee ee cee ks 81  Picture quality   0 20    eeceeccseecseecseesseecssessseesnecsucesntecatesateeatesssecsessessseesess 81  Picture out picture  POP    FAV SCAN button       eescescssssecsssecsssecssesssssessseeesneecsnecssseessneeesnsecesseees 80  SPLIT DUTCOM ies aa 78  PICKUPS SCrOl liss 76  Picture size selection   
75. 305  0174  0179  1325  1296  0393  0420  0032  0305  0157  0173  0032  0072  1294  1318  1372  1373  0681  0826  0626   0028  0037  0190  1317  0157  0305  0157  0029  0420  0157  0305  0626  0029  0157  0180  0000  0157  0157  0174  0868  0101  1063  0000  0032   0037  0145  0179   0305  0420  0437   0468  0029  0303  0420  0626  0157  1063  1062  0032  0305  0468  0157       CD players  cont     Brand Code  Proton 0157  QED 0157  Quasar 0029  RCA 1062  0032  0053    Realistic  Rotel  SAE  Sansui  Sanyo  Scott  Sears  Sharp  Sherwood  Sonic Frontiers  Sony    Soundesign  TDK  Tascam    Teac    Technics  Victor  Wards  Yamaha    Yorx    0179  0305  0468    0764   0179  0180  0420   0157  0420   0157   0157  0305   0179   0305   0305   0861  0037  0180   1067  0180   0157   0490  0000  0100   0185  0604  1364   0145   1208   0420   0174  0180  0393   0420   0029  0303   0072   0157  0053   0888  0036  0187   1292   0461    Laser disk players    Brand  Aiwa   Carver  Denon  Disco Vision  Funai  Harman Kardon  Hitachi  Magnavox  Marantz  Mitsubishi  NAD  Optimus  Panasonic  Philips  Pioneer   Polk Audio  Quasar  Realistic  Samsung  Sega   Sony  Technics  Theta Digital    Yamaha    Code  0203  0064  0194  0323  0059  0172  0023   0203   0194   0023  0194  0217  0064  0194  0059   0059   0059   0204  0064  0194  0059  0023  0194   0204   0203   0323   0023  0193  0201  0204   0194   0217    Miscellaneous audio devices    Brand   Aiwa   Fisher   JVC   Jerrold   Scientific Atlanta  
76. 4  0106  0169     0180       Cable boxes  Brand    ABC  ARCHER  CABLEVIEW  CITIZEN  CURTIS  DIAMOND  EAGLE  EASTERN  GCBRAND  GEMINI  G L JERROLD    HAMLIN    HITACHI  MACOM    MAGNAVOX  MEMOREX  MOVIETIME  OAK  PANASONIC    PHILIPS    PIONEER  PULSAR  PUSER  RCA  REALISTIC  REGAL    REGENCY  REMBRANT    SAMSUNG  S A   SLMARK  SPRUCER  STARGATE  TELECAPTION  TELEVIEW  TEXSCAN  TOCOM  TOSHIBA  UNIKA  UNIVERSAL  VIDEOWAY  VIEWSTAR  ZENITH  ZENITH DRAKE  SATELLITE    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 06 PM    Code    124   1132  1125  1105  1132  1122  1105  1112  1113  1124  1132  1125  1129  1134  132  1105   1122  1143   1119  1124  1125   126  1127  1120   1121  1122  1111   1123  1152   1140  1141  1142   1145  1118  1112  1103  1124   1103  1104  1105   1108  133  1130  1132  1105   1139  1137  1102  1109  1110  1114  1151  1153   1128  1129  1130  1106  1107  1150  131  1101  1116  1105  1132  1132  1115  1132  1112  1118  1140   1141  1142  1145   1149  1134  137  1132  1105   1138  105  1111  1112  1113  1105  1101   1105  1110  1132  1105   1148  101  1105  1144  1135  1136  1147  1104  1146  1132  1125  1122  1132   1106  1129  1130  1117  1100  1100             35       Chapter 3  Using the remote control       Multi brand remote control device codes  continued        CD players  Brand  ADMIRAL  AIWA  CARVER  DENON  EMERSON  FISHER  GARRARD    HARMAN KARDON    HITACHI  JENSEN  JVC    KENWOOD    LX
77. 5 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_081 088_4250HP95 86  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Adjusting the audio  continued        Adjusting the audio quality  You can adjust the audio quality by adjusting the bass  treble   and balance   To adjust the audio quality   1  Press MENU and open the Audio menu   2  Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER     Audio Settings  Advanced Audio Settings  Audio Setup        3  Navigate  6  Select Back Exit    3  Press V or A to highlight the item you want to adjust   Bass  Treble  or Balance      Bass 2  Treble Os  Balance 0 _   _   _   _     StableSound Off   Reset Done    4  Press 4 or P to adjust the level         lt q makes the bass or treble weaker or increases the balance  in the left channel  depending on the item selected         P makes the bass or treble stronger or increases the balance  in the right channel  depending on the item selected     5  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To reset the settings to the factory defaults   highlight Reset and press ENTER        Using the StableSound   feature    The StableSound   feature limits the highest volume level to  prevent extreme changes in volume when the signal source  changes  for example  to prevent the sudden increase in volume  that often happens when a TV program switches to a  commercial      To turn on the StableSound   feature   1  Press MENU and open the Audio me
78. 8    2114   2103  2111  2112  2103  2101  2102  2104  2101  2102  2118  2108  2106  2109  2110  2113  2106  2109  2110  2113   2107  2103  2108  2100  2103  2119   2120  2121  2122   2123  2124  2125  2101  2102             Menu layout and navigation              A  5         The illustrations below and on the next page provide a quick overview of your TV   s menu system        Main menu layout       To open the main menus  illustrated below   press MENU on the remote control or TV side panel     TV Guide On Screen        Launch Gemstar   TV GUIDE  Audio Player     Launch MP3 audio player  Applications Picture Viewer  gt  Launch the picture viewer  Digital CC   Audio Selector     Launch the ATSC Digital CC Selector  CableCARD        Dynamic list of items provided by inserted CableCARD     This option is not available if  CableCARD    is not inserted     a  ee    Video Advanced Picture Settings       Advanced Picture Settings Edit Window      F Picture Settings       Picture Settings Edit Window    Theater Settings       Theater Settings Edit Window      N    Audio Settings       Audio Settings Window    Advanced Audio Settings       Advanced Audio Settings Window    Audio Setup       Audio Setup Window      Audio    S    Favorite Channels       Favorite Channels Edit Window      Preferences Closed Caption Mode  gt  Off   CC1   CC2   CC3   CC4   T1   T2   T3   T4    M    Closed Caption Advanced       Advanced Closed Captions Window    Input Labeling       Input Labeling Edit W
79. CARD    into the CableCARD     slot       Always make sure the CableCARD    is facing the correct direction      Connect the cable for your digital cable TV service to ANT 1 only      When using a CableCARD     channel programming is unnecessary  because the CableCARD    automatically loads the cable channel  list into the TV s channel memory  page 44       The CableCARD    may take up to 5 minutes to    pair    with the TV  and download channel information  CableCARD    information and  channels will not be available until this process is completed        CableCARD    technology  like all new and emerging technology  may  from time to time experience compatibility issues due to the different ways  in which television manufacturers and cable system operators implement  the CableCARD    specifications  Most issues can be easily resolved  In  the event that you experience any performance related CableCARD     issues with your Toshiba television  please contact the following     Inthe U S   call TACP Consumer Solutions at  800  631 3811 or visit  http   www tacp com customersupport contact asp       In Canada  call TCL Customer Service at 1 800 268 3404              Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  1 3     01E_013 027_4250HP95 13  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 05 PM       Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV  no Cable box        You will need    gt  one signal splitter   gt  three coaxial cab
80. CATV system installer   s  attention to Article 820 40 of the U S  NEC  which provides  guidelines for proper grounding and  in particular  specifies  that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding  system of the building  as close to the point of cable entry  as practical  For additional antenna grounding information   see items 25 and 26 on page 4     2        01E_002 004_4250HP95 2  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON  PLASMA DISPLAY    If a fixed  non moving  pattern or image remains on the  Plasma display for extended periods of time  the image  can become permanently ingrained in the plasma TV  panel and cause subtle but permanent ghost images   This type of damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR  WARRANTY  See pages 4 and 5 for details     Child Safety            It Makes A Difference A e  Where Your TV Stands E    Congratulations on your purchase  As you enjoy  your new TV  keep these safety tips in mind     The Issue    0 If you are like most consumers  you have a TV in your home   Many homes  in fact  have more than one TV    QO  The home theater entertainment experience is a growing  trend  and larger TVs are popular purchases  however  they  are not always supported on the proper TV stands    O  Sometimes TVs are improperly secured or inappropriately  situated on dressers  bookcases  shelves  desks  audio  speakers  chests  or carts  As a result  TVs may fall over  causing  unnecessary injury     Toshiba Cares         
81. Check the antenna cable connections  see Chapter 2    e The station may have broadcast difficulties  Try another channel   e The sound may be muted  Press VOLUME     e If you hear no sound  try setting the MTS feature to Stereo mode  page 86    e Make sure the Speakers function in the Audio Setup menu is set correctly  page 88    e If you are not receiving a second audio program from a known SAP source  make sure the MTS feature is    set to SAP mode  page 86      e If you hear audio that seems    incorrect    for the program you are watching  such as music or a foreign    e When using an external audio amplifier  if you connect the amplifier to          language   the SAP mode may be on  Set the MTS feature to STEREO mode  page 86      the VAR  AUDIO OUT terminals     the volume of the TV and amplifier must be set above 0 or you will not hear any sound  page 21         Remote control problems    e Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode  page 30      e Remove all obstructions between the remote control and the TV     e The remote control batteries may be dead  Replace the batteries  page 30      e Your TV remote control may not operate certain features on your external device  Refer to the owner s  manual for your other device to determine its available features  If your TV remote control does not       operate a specific feature on another device  use the remote control that came with the device  page 30      e If the TV still does not act as expected
82. ER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER        Selecting the color temperature    You can change the quality of the picture by selecting from three    preset color temperatures  cool  medium  and warm   as  described below     Mode Picture Quality    Cool blueish  Medium neutral  Warm reddish                To select the color temperature   1  Press MENU and open the Video menu   2  Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER   3  Press W to highlight the Color Temperature field  and then    press or P to select the mode you prefer  Cool  Medium   or Warm         Picture Settings  Advanced Picture Settings  Theater Settings    Dynamic Contrast On   MPEG Noise Reduction Low   CableClear Auto   Color Temperature  lt  Cool  gt   Reset Done    4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER     Note    Ifyou select one of the factory set picture modes  Sports   Standard  or Movie  and then change the color temperature  mode  the picture mode automatically changes to Preference in  the Picture Settings menu     82 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_081 088_4250HP95 82  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Adjusting the picture  continued        Using MPEG noise reduction    The MPEG noise reduction feature allows you to reduce visible  interference caused by MPEG 
83. ER  see page 97 for   rout Lock oi  A Front Panel Lock Off  details    Game Timer Off     K New PIN Code  4  Press W to highlight  Raia  then press ENTER     5  Using the AV  lt P buttons  select the input for which you  want to change the rating limits  ANT1  ANT2  or Cable  Box  if connected  and press ENTER     A list of the channels available for that input will be displayed  along with the call letters for each channel  if available     6  Press AV to highlight    the channel you want to 4 OANT   block  then press OANT 2  ENTER  which puts an    Cable Box  eC       x    in the box next to  that channel     Allow All  Block All  Cancel    7  Repeat step 6 for other  channels you want to    block  vs  8  Highlight Done and press ENTER     OBOSBBOBBoOea     gt     Done       To unblock individual channels     In step 6 above  press AV to highlight the channel you want to  unblock  and then press ENTER to remove the    x    from the  box  and highlight Done  and then press ENTER     To block all channels at once     Highlight Block All in step 6 above  and then highlight Done   and press ENTER     To unblock all locked channels at once   Highlight Allow All in step 6 above   and then highlight Done   and press ENTER     Note  Channel blocking may RASNI ANT 1  not take effect if you have a a z             If you try to watch a TV program that exceeds the rating limits  you set  the TV enters program lock mode  You can either  unlock the program temporarily or select a non loc
84. F to highlight the item you want to adjust     6  Press or P to make the appropriate adjustments     Horizontal Position 0__   ___      Horizontal Width a   Vertical Position     e   _   _      Vertical Height 0S   Clock Phase ee   Sampling Clock  es   pe  Reset Done       Horizontal Position Vertical Position     Adjusts picture left right and up down  The adjustment range  is within  5 from center      The adjustable range may vary depending on the input mode      e Horizontal Width Vertical Hegiht   Adjusts picture width of Horizontal and picture height of Vertical   The adjustment range is within  5 from center     e Clock Phase   This function is to reduce noise and sharpen the picture   The adjustment range is within  15 from center     e Sampling Clock     This function is to minimize periodic vertical stripes on the  screen     The adjustment range is within  15 from center        The long life settings  Picture shift  Gray level  Reverse  and  White  help to reduce the risk of phosphor burn in of the    plasma screen     Picture Shift    With Picture Shift set to on  the picture imperceptibly moves  around the screen intermittently to reduce the risk of phosphor  burn in of the plasma screen     Note  To reduce the risk of phosphor burn in  the default setting for  the Picture Shift function is On   To activate the picture shift feature   1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   2  Highlight Long Life and press P     a Sleep Timer  On Off Timer  PC Settings    HDMI Au
85. I  MAGNAVOX  MARANTZ  MACINTOSH  NAKAMICHI  ONKYO  OPTIMUS    PANASONIC    PHILIPS  PIONEER  QUASAR  RCA    SANSUI  SANYO  SCOTT  SHARP  SHERWOOD  SONY  SOUNDE SIGH  TEAC  TECHNICS  VICTOR  YAMAHA    Receivers  Brand  ADMIRAL    AIWA  DENON    FISHER  GARRARD    HARMAN KARDON    JENSEN  Jvc    KENWOOD    MAGNAVOX  MARANTZ  MCNTOSH  MITSUBISHI  NAKAMICHI  ONKYO  OPTIMUS    PANASONIC  PHILIPS    36     01E_02   036_4250HP95  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Code    6126   6133  6135   6129   6142  6151   6139   6105  6106   6117   6120  6121  6123  6119   6107   6134   6140  6141  6145   6148  6151  6100  6101  6111   6145   6136   6129  6132   6129   6121   6110   6114  6115  6108  6118  6120  6122   6124  6125  6127   6150   6129  6130  6149  6108   6125  6127  6124  6147  6137  6138   6131  6152  6110  6146  6113  6105   6110  6146  6142  6143   6120   6128   6144   6112  6116  6118  6127  6124  6125  6140  6141  6145  6102  6103  6104    Code    4120   4125  4126  4146  4134  4135  4136  4143  4104  4113  4115  4123  4145  4129  4132  4133  4140   4144  4100  4108  4141   4142  4147   4127  4128   4124   4116   4148   4106  4117   4109  4114   4103  4127  4131   4130   4119  4118  4121  4123       36       Receivers  cont    Brand    PIONEER  QUASAR  RCA    SANSUI   SHARP   SONY  SOUNDE SIGH  TEAC    TECHNICS  VICTOR  YAMAHA    Laser disks  Brand    DENON  HITACHI  KENWOOD  MAGNAVOX  MARANTZ  MITSUBISHI  NEC  PANASONIC    PHILIPS  PIONEER  PROSCAN  QUASAR    RCA  SAMS
86. ION  All rights reserved      01E_008 009_4250HP95 9  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       10           AFTER connecting all cables and devices  plug in the  power cords for your TV and other devices        Now Booting       will be displayed on the screen until the picture  appears or the green LED will blink until the TV goes into  standby mode    When the TV is in standby mode  press POWER on the TV side  panel or remote control to turn on the TV        If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control  or TV side panel and you cannot turn the TV off or on  press  and hold the POWER button for 5 seconds to reset the TV              11  See    Menu layout and navigation    for a quick overview    of navigating the TV   s menu system  pages 37 38      See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  On Screen    system  if available in your area      See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  On Screen    program guide  if available in your area    Program channels into the TV   s channel memory   page 44     Set up the TheaterNet    on screen device control    feature  if applicable to your particular home theater system  components   page 47      For details on using the memory card JPEG picture  viewer and MP3 audio player  see page 89     For details on using the TV   s features  see Chapter 8     For help  refer to the Troubleshooting Guide  Chapter  10      For technical specifications and warranty information   see Chapter 11       Enjoy
87. ION  All rights reserved     41     01E_039 042_4250HP95 41 05 9 12  10 07 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       Chapter 5  TV Guide On Screen    setup       Setting up the TV Guide On Screen    system  continued        42    Screen 20  If your VCR stopped playing the tape after testing     select Yes and press ENTER  Screen 21 appears     If your VCR did not  stop playing the tape  after testing and you Tee  want to test the same Ca  code again  select A coud     Test this code again       and press ENTER     If you want to test a  different code  select No and press ENTER  Screen 19  appears           ARa y UY rama ee A pama raar PE AO An    Note  Many VCRs require testing more than one code     Screen 21  Review the setup information displayed on your TV    screen  an example is shown below      Viu have pampa the foliar TV Guiar Or Sireen gaem    If the information on      your TV screen is e celle sha eae umi  correct for your setup   eC     select    Yes  end setup  and press ENTER  aT    Vex end setup    Screen 22 appears   i rapa a ORE    If the information is aaan    ate   incorrect  select    No   repeat setup process    and press ENTER  Screen 1 appears     Screen 22  Congratulations  You have successfully completed    TV Guide On Screen    system setup     Press ENTER to  display screen 23     tion or athe configuration  ive any changes to your local channel  s    Screen 23  This screen provides helpful information on using    your TV Guide On Screen    sy
88. ITED  THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND  IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES  GUARANTEES  AGREEMENTS   AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE  REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS  IN NO EVENT SHALL  TACP BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES   INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  LOST PROFITS  BUSINESS  INTERRUPTION  OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED  DATA CAUSED BY USE  MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS  PLASMA TELEVISION      No person  agent  distributor  dealer  or company is authorized to change   modify  or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever   The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any  obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law of  the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety  90  days  from the date you discover  or should have discovered  the defect  This  limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any  state of the U S A     THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY  ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE  IN THE U S A  SOME STATES OF THE U S A  DO NOT ALLOW  LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY  WHEN  AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT  OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION  OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  THEREFORE  THE  ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH  CIRCUMSTANCES     1 03 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_107 111_4250H
89. ODE button to control your other devices       Your TV remote control has one dedicated TV mode and five programmable  multi brand modes  CBL SAT  VCR PVR  DVD  AUDIO 1  and AUDIO 2  The    default device modes and programmable device modes are listed below     Note  The TV remote control is preprogrammed to operate most Toshiba devices  If  you own a non Toshiba device or a Toshiba device that the remote control is not    preprogrammed to operate  you will need to program the remote control  See     Programming the remote control to operate your other devices    on page 33                                                     MODE Default device mode control  before programming   1  TV Toshiba TV  2  CBL SAT   Toshiba Satellite receiver  3  VCR PVR   Toshiba VCR  4  DVD Toshiba DVD  5  AUDIO 1   Pioneer Audio receiver  6  AUDIO 2   Pioneer LD  MODE Device mode control after programming  1  TV Toshiba TV  2  CBL SAT  3  VCR PVR  4  DVD Multi brand video audio devices  5  AUDIO 1  6  AUDIO 2    You can directly select the device mode by pressing the corresponding  number button  1 6  while pressing the MODE button     30       DTV    2 CBLISAT    3 VCRIPVR  a       SAUDIT Number  1 6      gt  6 AUDIO2    MODE       Note    Although your new TV s remote control includes  codes for many devices  it may not include  codes for some or all of the features on certain  devices you wish to control  If you are unable to  program the TV s remote control to operate  your device or some of 
90. P95 108  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 11 PM    Chapter 11  Appendix       Limited Canada Warranty    for Plasma Televisions       Toshiba Canada Limited     TCL     makes the following limited warranties to  original consumers in Canada  THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND  TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON  RECEIVING THIS PLASMA TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE  ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER  PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE     PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED  ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF CANADA  INCLUDING  WITHOUT  LIMITATION  THE U S A  AND MEXICO  ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE  WARRANTIES     PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF  CANADA  INCLUDING  WITHOUT LIMITATION  THE U S A  AND  MEXICO  AND USED IN CANADA  ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE  WARRANTIES     Limited One  1  Year Warranty on Parts and Labor    TCL warrants this Plasma Television and its parts against defects in materials  or workmanship for a period of one  1  year after the date of original retail  purchase  DURING THIS PERIOD  TCL WILL  AT TCLS OPTION  REPAIR  OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED  PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR LABOR  During this  period  TCL Authorized Service Depot personnel will come to your home  when warranty service is required  Depending on the type of repair required   the service will either be performed in your home or the Plasma Television  will be taken to a TCL Authorized Service Depot for repair and return
91. Press  lt     Example  Press  gt                                POP double window aspect ratio    The POP double window feature displays each picture according to its input signal    aspect ratio  as illustrated in the examples below         01E_069 080_4250HP95 79  Black    3    NS    Se    POWER    ae         SIVCRIPVR       oyero     gt  SIAUDION    Hooo    MODE     0009    10  ACTION       MENU       N      amp   a  spp STI O  S a LY    P   e    Mi  xo    x  k     EN     LS   DVD CLEAR    DVD RTN  SLOW  SKIP  aw         Note       The auto aspect feature  page 76  does not  operate in double window mode     Aspect ratio is the ratio of width to height of the  picture     NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE  EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY    Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma  display for extended periods of time  Fixed  non   moving  images  including  but not limited to  PIP   POP windows  closed captions  video game    patterns  TV station logos  stock tickers  and  websites  and special formats that do not use the  entire screen  can become permanently ingrained  in the Plasma display and cause subtle  but  permanent  ghost images  This type of damage  is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY  See  pages 4 and 5 for details        Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  79     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Using the FREEZE feature       1  When viewing the TV  press FREEZE to make the picture a 
92. R        Audio Settings  Advanced Audio Settings  Audio Setup    3  Press W to highlight the MTS field  and then press or  gt   to select Stereo     MTS  lt  Stereo  gt   Language English  Speakers On  Optical Output Format Dolby Digital  Reset Done    4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To reset the settings to the factory defaults   highlight Reset and press ENTER     Note      You can leave the TV in Stereo mode because it automatically  outputs the type of sound being broadcast  stereo or monaural       Ifthe stereo sound is noisy  select MONO to reduce the noise     To listen to an alternate language on an ATSC digital station   if available      Highlight the Language field in step 3 above  and then press  lt   or P to select the language you prefer     To listen to a second audio program on an analog station  if  available      Select SAP in step 3 above   Note       A second audio program  SAP  can be heard only on those TV  stations that offer it  For example  a station might broadcast another  language as a second audio program  If you have SAP on  you will  see the current program on the screen but hear the other language  instead of the program s normal audio       Ifyou have SAP on and the station you are watching is not  broadcasting a second audio program  the station   s normal audio  will be output  However  occasionally there is no sound at all in SAP  mode  If this happens  set the MTS feature to Stereo mode     86 Copyright    200
93. REMOVE COVER  OR BACK    NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE  REFER  SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL     The lightning symbol in the triangle tells you that the  voltage inside this product may be strong enough to  cause an electric shock  DO NOT TRY TO SERVICE  THIS PRODUCT YOURSELF     The exclamation mark in the triangle tells you that  important operating and maintenance instructions  follow this symbol     To prevent injury  this apparatus must be securely attached  to the floor wall in accordance with the installation  instructions   See item 19 on page 3      WARNING  If you decide to wall mount this television   always use the Toshiba wall bracket specified below or  another UL approved wall bracket appropriate for the size  and weight of this television  The use of any wall bracket  other than the Toshiba wall bracket specified below or  another UL approved wall bracket appropriate for the size  and weight of this television for wall mounting this television  could result in serious bodily injury and or property damage   In the U S     Use Toshiba wall bracket model number FWB3250 or  if no  longer available  another UL approved wall bracket  appropriate for the size and weight of the television  For more  information  call TACP   s Consumer Solutions Center at 1 800   631 3811 or visit TACP   s website at www tacp toshiba com   In Canada    Call TCL   s Customer Service Department at 1 800 268 3404     NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS    This is a reminder to call the 
94. Remind defaults    1  From the SETUP screen  highlight CHANGE DEFAULT  OPTIONS and press ENTER     2  Highlight REMIND DEFAULTS and press MENU to  display the Remind Defaults panel menu        adhat reminder time if uiing auto tune    Press Memes to access options 10  select whether to auto tune       3  Enter the required information in the panel menu fields   power On TV  auto tune  when to display the Remind  screen   See    Remind features    on page 65 for details on  entering values in these fields    4  When finished  press ENTER to highlight DONE  and  press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the  changes  or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with  no changes      68 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_064 068_4250HP95 68  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM        amp   Using the TV s features       Selecting the video input source to view       To select the video input source to view     1  Press INPUT on the remote control or TV VIDEO on the  TV side panel     2  Press 0 8 to select the input source you want to view  which    will depend on the input terminals you used to connect  your devices  see Chapter 2     The current signal source displays in the top right corner of  the Input Selection screen     Input Selection    JO anti    Video 1    Video 2     Video 3    ColorStream HD1     ColorStream HD2     HDMI    PC    ANT 2             GID to Select       Note      When the Input Selection screen is ope
95. See    Record icons     below right    Note  Manual recording is listed by channel number   Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the    menu  change no information  and return to the    highlighted show        When using the TV Guide On Screen    system to record a program for the  first time  it is recommended that you perform a test recording to make  sure your system is set up properly              Recording notification banner  e Ifthe TV is not on  the recording occurs as scheduled     e Ifthe TV is on and you are watching the channel that is set to  record  the recording occurs as scheduled     e Ifthe TV is on and you are watching a channel other than  the one that is set to record  a notification banner  illustrated  below  appears on screen before recording starts  At that time  you can choose to start or cancel recording     The default highlighted item in the notification banner is     Change channel  start recording     If no change is made  within 3 minutes  the notification banner will close  automatically  the channel will change to the one set to  record  and the recording will occur as scheduled  If you want  to cancel the recording  select    Don t change  cancel  recording    in the notification banner and press ENTER        EA Recordi 7     TV Guide On Screen needs to change the hannel at 2 03am to record     YUOe 32   A       change channel  start recording          Record conflict  A conflict message appears for the following reasons     e A show
96. Sony   Starcom    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 08 PM    Code   0010  0159  0404  0052   0073   0520  0459   0460   0010  0159  0576  0459       49    Chapter 6  Setting up your TV    TheaterNet  IR device codes  continued     Brand  Panasonic  Pioneer  Princeton  Samsung  Sensory Science    Sharp    Receivers  Brand  ADC    Aiwa    Alco   Anam   Apex Digital   Arcam   Audiotronic  Audiovox   Bose   Cambridge Soundworks  Capetronic   Carver    Casio  Clarinette  Compaq  Curtis Mathes  Daewoo  Denon    Fisher   Garrard  Harman Kardon  Hewlett Packard  JBL   JVC   KLH    Kenwood    Koss  LXI  Lasonic  Linn  Lloyd   s  MCS    Magnavox  Marantz    Modulaire  Musicmagic  Nakamichi  Onkyo  Optimus    Panasonic    Penney  Philips       50     01E_046 054_4250HP95      Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Video accessory  HDTV decoder     Code  1120  1010  0113  0295  1190  1126  1010    Code  0531  1089  1405  0121   0158  0189  0405  1388  1641  1390  1609  1257  1120  1189  1390  1229  1370  0531  1089  1189  0042  0189  0195  0195  1136  0080  1250  1104  1160  0004  1360  0042  1801  0463  0110  0189  0891  1181  0110  1306  0074  1374  1390  1313  1027  1570   1569  0027  0042  0186  1366  0181  1798  0189  0195  0039  1089  1189  0189  0195  0391  0531  1089  1189  0039  0189  0195  1089  0097  0135  0842  1298  1023  0042  0080  0181  0186  0531   0670  0738  0801  1518  0039  0309  0367  0195  1089 
97. UNG  SANYO  SHARP  SONY    TEAC  TOSHIBA  YAMAHA    Code    4105  4107  4150  4119  4118  4121  4103  4105  4127   4131  4130  4149  4103  4111  4139  4134  4137  4122   4138  4112  4113  4111   4110  4121  4118  4119  4132  4133   4101  4102                  2   y     114  00  102  5103  101          A    114  5118  5119  14  104  5105  5106   15  11  114    04  5105  5106        pa  v    14       Ha  N    114  5117  13 5116   107  5108  5109   10   14   114   01    VY Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y A A A A A A A A A A A        A          DVD players  Brand    AIWA  APEX  DENON  FERGUSON  HITACHI  Jvc  KENWOOD  KONKA  MITSUBISHI  NORDMENDE  ONKYO  ORITRON  PANASONIC  PHILIPS  PIONEER  RAITE   RCA   SABA  SAMPO  SAMSUNG  SHARP  SYLVANIA  SMC   SONY    TECHNICS  THOMSON  TOSHIBA  WAVE  YAMAHA  ZENITH  VIALTA  FUNAI    Satellite receivers    Brand    DISH NETWORK     Echostar   ECHOSTAR  EXPRESS VU  G E   G I  GENERAL    INSTRUMENT     GRADIENTE  HITACHI  HNS Hughes   MAGNAVOX  PANASONIC  PHILIPS  PRIMESTAR  PROSCAN    RCA  SONY    STAR CHOICE  TOSHIBA    UNIDEN    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     05 9 12  10 06 PM    Code    3123   3120  3100  3117  3101   3111   3109  3115  3129  3119   3105   3101   3121   3124   3100  3103  3116  3102   3113  3101  3106  3101   3114   3110   3108  3132  3118  3125  3104  3126  3127  3128   3100   3101   3103   3122  3100  3130  3107  3112  3131  3132  3118    Code   2105  2115  2116   2117   2105   2105  2115   2106   210
98. VCRs can record and play  VHS or S VHS format videos  Such devices allow you to play  analog tapes that you rented or recorded  or record analog  programs from antenna or Cable TV systems  To use the  TEEE1394 device   s analog features  you need to connect the  device to the TV using standard A V cables  or S video plus  audio cables  in addition to connecting the IEEE1394 cable     Note  lf you have an IEEE1394 device connected to both digital  and analog inputs on the TV  the TV automatically switches  between analog and digital modes  as needed  when the initial  device access is initiated using the TheaterNet button    See page 47 for details on using the TheaterNet feature        Supported signals    The IEEE1394 ports support the signals listed below only   Although incompatible video  audio  and digital control signals  cannot be decoded by the TV  these signals may be passed  through the IEEE1394 cable to other compatible devices     Incompatible devices may not appear in the TheaterNet    menu     e MPEG 2 digital video signals  Other digital video signals   such as DV video   are  incompatible and must be decoded by the source device and  sent to the TV as analog video  composite or S video      e Dolby Digital and MPEG digital audio signals  Other digital audio signals  such as DPM  MP3  and DTS  are  incompatible and cannot be decoded by the TV        EIA 775 and AV C digital control    Your TV can serve as the control center for many devices  that are compatible
99. Video 5  Press P to highlight On and press ENTER  When the side  Lock is activated  30  60  90  or 120 minutes  and press panel is locked and a button on the side panel except  ENTER  POWER button is pressed  the message    Not Available      appears   TCT ann  Channels Block Enable ea aed Off  Pot tal EE  input Lock    a Code      Game Timer  To cancel the GameTimer         Se eo  Select Off in step 5 above  To unlock the side panel   To deactivate the video lock once the GameTimer has Highlight Off in step 5 above  or press and hold the  aed ite VOLUME  lt  button on the TV side panel for about 10    ds until the volume i      Set the Video Lock to Off  see    Locking video inputs    on page S peyote Oe aa  99   TV side panel  Note     A message will appear on screen when 10 minutes  3  minutes  and 1 minute remain on the GameTimer     Ifthe TV loses power with time remaining on the GameTimer   when power is restored the TV will enter VIDEO LOCK mode   as if the GameTimer has expired  and you will have to  deactivate the video lock  as described above    VOLUME  lt   100 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_097 100_4250HP95 100    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 11 PM       10 Troubleshooting       General troubleshooting       Symptom    Before calling a service technician  please check the following table for a possible cause of the symptom and some solutions     Solution       TV will not turn on    e Make sure the power 
100. When you use a Cable box  you may not be able to  use the remote control to program or access certain features  on the TV     To view the DVD player   Turn ON the DVD player  Select the VIDEO 2 video  input source on the TV      To view the VCR     Turn ON the VCR  Select the VIDEO 1 video input source  on the TV        To select the video input source  press INPUT on the remote control     see page 69   To program the TV remote control to operate other  devices  see Chapter 3           The unauthorized recording  use  distribution  or revision of television  programs  videotapes  DVDs  and other materials is prohibited under the  Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries  and may  subject you to civil and criminal liability           Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_013 027_4250HP95 17  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    From antenna or Cable TV    Cable box Signal splitter IN    aaa IN OUT  ours         Stereo VCR  C                 me   m     U     VARIABLE    ani  AUDIO    PCIN                   DVD player with S video    Note  The VIDEO AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1   ANT 2  VIDEO 1  VIDEO 2  and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate  input mode is selected           C To use the TV Guide On Screen    recording features    1  Connect the G LINK    cable according to the  instructions on page 26    2  Make sure the VCR is connected to the A V OUT  terminals on the TV  see illustration     3  Set the
101. XIT          TV VIDEO           ENTER  A   The MENU button on the TV  lt   gt   side panel functions as the y  ENTER button when a menu is  on screen  EXIT                Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     05 9 12  10 06 PM       5  TV Guide On Screen    setup       Setting up the TV Guide On Screen    system       The TV Guide On Screen    system in your TV is a no fee  interactive program guide that uses the information you enter  during the following setup process to provide you with a  channel lineup and program listings for your area  The listings  are automatically updated several times a day   Note   e You must first set up your TV according to the applicable  connection instructions in Chapter 2   e Ifyou connected a Toshiba Symbio  AVHD Recorder  you  must perform the following TV Guide On Screen    system setup  in order to use the Symbio   s full functionality  See pages 24 and  52 for further details about AVHD digital recorders     To set up the TV Guide On Screen    system   1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   2  Highlight Installation and press ENTER     DSSA   Setup OO   Installation   Sleep Timer   On Off Timer    PC Settings  HDMI Audio Auto  Slide Show Interval 2 Sec  y AVHD Skip Time 15 min    3  A new set of Installation  hml nad A GT    menu icons appears   x s TV Guide On Screen Setup  on screen  see illustration      summen  at right   Open the  TV Guide On Screen       Setup menu  highlight  Start  and press ENTER      
102. XIT to close the picture viewer and return to the regular    TV screen     To restart the picture viewer while the memory card is still  inserted     1  Press MENU and open the Applications menu   2  Highlight Picture Viewer and press ENTER     TV Guide On Screen  Audio Player   Picture Viewer   Digital CC Audio Selector  CableCARD     Gy Navigate     Select GH Back Ex Exit       3  Follow the steps under    To view digital photos on your    IV    on the previous page     To close the picture viewer and remove the memory card     1  Press EXIT to close the picture viewer and return to the    regular TV screen     NOTE  ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE  VIEWER BEFORE REMOVING THE    MEMORY CARD     Ifyou remove the memory card while viewing pictures  the card  and or saved data may be damaged  THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE  IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY        2  For a CompactFlash memory card  press the ejector button    and then pull the card straight out from the TV  For all  other memory cards  pull the card straight out from the TV        Using the MP3 audio player    Note      Ifyou stored both JPEG and MP3 files on the same memory card  the  JPEG picture viewer will start automatically when you insert the  memory card in the TV  To start the audio player  you must first press  EXIT to close the picture viewer and then start the audio player while  the memory card is still inserted  See    To start the MP3 audio player  when a memory card is already inserted     next page  Yo
103. a will not compensate  for any lost data or recordings caused by the use of such  cards     92 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_089 096_4250HP95 92    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 10 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Setting the On Off Timer    Setting the sleep timer       You can use the On Off Timer to turn the TV on and off at a  preset time on a recurring basis     Note  You must first set the time  see page 52      To set the On Off Timer   1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   2  Highlight On Off Timer and press ENTER     Installation   Sleep Timer   On Off Timer   PC Settings   HDMI Audio Auto   Slide Show Interval 2 Sec  w AVHD Skip Time 15 min        3  Navigate  6  Select Back Exit    3  Press W to highlight the DAY field  and then press  lt  or P to  select the recurrence  weekends  weekdays  Every Day  etc      On Off Timer  Turn TV ON   Day  lt  Weekends  gt   Time  HH MM  09 00 AM  TV ON Duration  30 Minutes  Reset Cancel Done        Press W to highlight the Time field  and then use the  Number buttons to enter the time you want the TV to turn  on    5  When the AM PM field is highlighted  press P to select  AM or PM    6  Press W to highlight the TV ON Duration field  and then  press or P to select the length of time until the TV turns  off  30 Minutes  12 Hours  8 Hours  4 Hours  2 Hours  1  Hour      7  Highlight Done and press ENTER     8  Turn off the TV  The TV will turn on automati
104. annel memory  While the TV is cycling  through the channels  the message    Scanning channels   please wait    appears  as shown above     6  To cancel channel programming  either press EXIT or  highlight Abort in the on screen display and press ENTER     When channel programming is done  press CHANNEL  A or Y to view the programmed channels     TV side panel    POWER    ov          SVORPIR    ra OOO     gt  S AUDION      000 Channel      amp        Numbers    gcs    10       CHANNEL A  CHANNEL       CHANNEL             MENU   ENTER                 Ea CLEAR       Installation menu icons will appear on screen   CHANNEL AV   Sleep Timer  On Off Timer  PC Settings  HDMI Audio Auto  Slide Show Interval 2 Sec   v AVHD Skip Time 15 min   44 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_043 045_4250HP95 44  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 07 PM    Chapter 6  Setting up your TV       Programming channels into the TV   s channel memory  continued        Manually adding and deleting channels in  the channel memory   After automatically programming channels into the channel  memory  you can manually add or delete individual channels   To add or delete channels in the channel memory     1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   2  Highlight Installation and press ENTER   A new set of    Installation menu icons will appear on screen  as shown in    step 3      Installation  Sleep Timer  On Off Timer    PC Settings   HDMI Audio Auto   Slide Show Inter
105. avigate  G  Select GHI Back GH Exit       4  Go to Chapter 5 for instructions on completing the setup     Read this chapter for details on using the TV Guide  On Screen    interactive program guide     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  55     01E_055 058_4250HP95 55  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 08 PM          Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       Navigating the TV Guide On Screen    system       TV GUIDE Time Current Service  a While watching TV  Logo Clock Slot Time Tab Label Tile Highlight  press TV GUIDE to Oa USTINGS  SEARCH ZA  enter the TV Guide wwides rom ea 4  On Screen    system  ig Goce Remarka m  The LISTINGS screen af a Th      will appear with the current z eiis T AS rar  show highlighted        When in the TV Guide    On Screen    system  if you    CASE    North Shore  Tessa   Drama  Jason offers a housekeeping position to a crafty ex con   Amanda Righetti  who won t rest until she s scored serious points with Vincent   and  a better job  Brooke Burns  Kristoffer Polaha  TV14  Strong Language  Suggestive  Dialogue  N    press TV GUIDE from any  screen  the TV will tune to the  show displayed in the Video  Window    e Use the arrow keys on the  remote control  AW4 P  to  highlight any show  and then  press ENTER to tune to that d  show  VY here MSO FRIGHT HAT A     Scroll left or right  4 Panel aa    P  to view eight days of listings     Tonight 87pm    e Press MENU to display a
106. box  and then press ENTER  Screen 7 appears     O STEP econo Ter ere  TI saa ees Cnty Ga Ce Soar ined  li to know the channel your FV a on wher usg eee  OAOA CASA os AOO cov vow cate ror  You are umure  as an incorrect seterson ae eee nl  whale watzhing TV     What is your TV tuned to when using the cable box     m  ai  ae             Screen 7  The on screen diagram shows the correct way to  connect your Cable box to the G LINK    terminal on the    TV  Make sure the G LINK    cable is installed properly     For additional details  see page 26   Press ENTER to display screen 8     The TV Gad On Swen verter coments wet  UINE cbt pos hare rt sad connected  Dane Veter 1a Aa Tv Cache On Soman Seug Shen cn the hag       1h cdo ant GAN fc   a tho bat ot your TT  ol Coe GUNK cable mand verre the cable bon se  tthe tener it che cable has at a diane cf about one  1  wich        Screen 8  Highlight your Cable box brand  and then press  ENTER to display screen 9     EANA TEW  poervet rabe ben brane from the lant 5 newded te auioewtica  y    fee boy ag A yau do ol Ano Pe etext peme  comiat yer cable    What brand of cable box is connected to this TV   Not Usted       Ascher             Screen 9  To allow the TV Guide On Screen    system to find  the correct code for your brand of Cable box  tune your  Cable box to channel 02  leave the Cable box and TV ON   and then T ENTER  Screen 10 appears     my ore     nef VE CPB  Te a rao amn a araara es tbe  corre cose to contro  your cable    Fol
107. cally on the  day s  and at the time you set  The TV will then turn off  automatically after the length of time you set in the TV  ON Duration field    Note     When a power failure occurs  the On Off Timer settings may  be cleared       To display the On Off Timer setting  press RECALL   To turn off the On Off Timer        You can set the sleep timer to turn off the TV after a set length  of time  maximum of 3 hours   The sleep timer turns off the TV  one time only  as opposed to the On Off Timer  which turns off  the TV on a recurring basis     To set the sleep timer     Press SLEEP on the remote control to set the length of time until  the TV turns off  Repeatedly press SLEEP to increase the time in  10 minute increments or press A or W to increase or decrease the  time in 10 minute increments  to a maximum of 3 hours and 00  minutes     To cancel the sleep timer   Press SLEEP until it is set to 0     an POWER  PA OLO    S VCRIPYR   OOO    S AUDION    To set the sleep timer using the on screen menus           SLEEP       1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   2  Highlight Sleep Timer and press ENTER     Installation    Sleep Timer    On Off Timer   PC Settings   HDMI Audio Auto   Slide Show Interval 2 Sec  y AVHD Skip Time 15 min     GpNavigate     select GL Back BI Exit    3  Press the Number buttons to enter the length of time in 10   minute increments     Sleep Timer       Enter total minutes until the TV  turns off automatically  Maximum  180 minutes     120    Cancel
108. cel  and press ENTER before saving your changes                                                                 the ANT 1 antenna input  To view the list of channels R           ae  u 2    nalog  programmed for ANT 2 or Cable box antenna input  press m2    Digital OANT2  the A    to highlight either    ANT 2    or    Cable Box    and mee    Digital   Cable Box  3 Analog  press ENTER  WM 4 Analog     u     H   z  5    Digital  Note     Cable Box    will appear only if you connected a cable A ETA  box to your TV 7 Analog Reset  M 7 1 a Digital Cancel  wm os    Analog Done  ag 2 Rs Analog   ANTI 4m i gi Analog OANT1  2 1 2 Digital OANT2 2 Analog OANT2  2 2    Digital O Cable Box o 3 Analog   Cable Box  o 3 Analog A 4 Analog  B 4 Analog A 5 Analog    A 5 x Analog A 6 Analog  E 6 Analog E 7 Analog  o 7 Analog Reset O s Analog Reset  71   Digital Cancel 9    Analog Cancel  vo 8 i Analog Done va 10 Analog Done  Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  45     01E_043 045_4250HP95 45  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 07 PM    Chapter 6  Setting up your TV       Programming your favorite channels             You can program up to 27 channels as favorite channels into To clear your favorite channel lists   three Favorite Channel sets  nine channels from the ANT 1 1  Press MENU and open the JEdit Favorite Channels  ANT2    input  nine from the ANT 2 input  and nine from the Cable Preferences menu  me     box input    You can then scan through your fav
109. cluded with this  distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is  Tim Hudson  tjh cryptsoft com      Copyright remains Eric Young   s  and as such any Copyright notices in the  code are not to be removed  If this package is used in a product  Eric  Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library  used  This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in  documentation  online or textual  provided with the package   Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without  modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions are met   1  Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice  this list of  conditions and the following disclaimer   2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice   this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation  and or other materials provided with the distribution   3  All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must  display the following acknowledgement     This product includes  cryptographic software written by Eric Young  eay cryptsoft com      The  word    cryptographic    can be left out if the routines from the library being  used are not cryptographic related   4  If you include any Windows specific code  or derivative thereof  from the  apps directory  application code  you must include an acknowledgement      This product includes software writte
110. combination Monday through  Friday   Regularly    records reminds the show every time the show  airs on the same channel and starts at the same time   Weekly    records reminds the show each time the show airs  on the same day of the week  on the same channel and starts  at the same time     Off  not cancel    keeps the show in the schedule list but will  not record remind the show until the frequency is changed     1 06 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_101 106_4250HP95 106  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 11 PM       LD Appendix       Specifications       NOTE     This model complies with the specifications listed below      Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice      This model may not be compatible with features and or specifications that may be added in the future     Television System Video Audio Terminals  continued   NTSC standard HDMI    INPUT   ATSC standard  8VSB  HDMI compliant  type A connector   Digital Cable  64 QAM  256 QAM  in the clear  unencrypted   HDCP compliant     Encrypted channels can be viewed on this TV E EDID   compliant  using a CableCARD     See page 13 for details  Suggested formats  1080i  480p  480i  720p  Channel Coverage HDMI Audio  2 channel PCM  32 44 1 48 kHz sampling  VHF  2 through 13 frequency  16 20 24 bits per sample    UHF  14 through 69    Cable TV  Mid band  A 8 through A 1  A through I  PE INPUT     15 pin D sub Analog RGB    Super band  J through W   H
111. compression  Choices for MPEG  noise reduction are High  Medium  Low and Off  Off is  automatically selected when this feature is disabled     grayed  out      This feature is not available in the PC input mode     To select the MPEG noise reduction level     1  Press MENU and open the Video menu   2  Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER        Picture Settings  Advanced Picture Settings  Theater Settings    3  Press W to highlight the MPEG Noise Reduction field  and  then press  lt  or P to make a selection     Dynamic Contrast On  MPEG Noise Reduction  lt 4 Off  gt   CableClear Auto  Color Temperature Cool  Reset Done    4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER        Using dynamic contrast    When dynamic contrast is set to    On     the TV will detect  changes in the picture quality that affect the appearance of your  contrast settings and then automatically adjust the video     When dynamic contrast is set to    Off     the settings selected in  the Contrast field in Picture Settings will be used   To select dynamic contrast preferences    1  Press MENU and open the Video menu    2  Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER        Picture Settings  Advanced Picture Settings  Theater Settings    3  Press W to highlight the Dynamic Contrast field  and then  press  lt  or P to make a selection  On or Off      Dynamic Contrast  lt  On  gt   MPEG Noise Reduction O
112. control icons and the TV   s  remote control    Note      Although the TheaterNet on screen device control feature includes  codes for many devices  it may not include codes for some or all of  the features on certain devices you wish to control  If you are  unable to program the TheaterNet feature to operate your device  or some of the features on that device  use the device   s remote  control or the controls on the device      For IR pass through device control information  see    Controlling  infrared remote controlled devices through the TV  IR pass   through     on page 22     Setting up TheaterNet    All device types except IEEE1394 require the following setup  process before you can control them using the TheaterNet on   screen icons   All compatible IEEE1394 devices are automatically recognized  by the TheaterNet feature and do not require setup   Note  See page 23 for details about the  EEE1394 ports  If your   EEE1394 device is not recognized through the  EEE1394 port or  through the TheaterNet feature  it may be possible to set it up for IR  pass through control as an infrared device  see page 22      To set up TheaterNet device control   1  Make sure you have properly connected your infrared  remote controlled device s   See page 22 for details   2  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   3  Highlight Installation and press ENTER   A new set of    Installation menu icons will appear on screen  as shown in    step 4      Installation  Sleep Timer    On Off Timer   PC
113. cord is plugged in  and then press POWER   e The remote control batteries may be dead  Replace the batteries or try the side panel buttons        Picture problems       Noisy picture       Video Input Selection  problems       Cannot view external signals  or channel 3 or 4       Black box on screen       Poor color or no color       POP problems       e Check the antenna cable connections  Chapter 2     e Press INPUT on the remote control or TV VIDEO on the TV side panel and select a valid video input  source  page 69   If no device is connected to any of the inputs on the TV  no picture will display when  you select that particular input source  For device connection details  see Chapter 2    e Antenna reception may be poor  Use a highly directional outdoor antenna  if applicable     e The station may have broadcast difficulties  Try another channel    e Adjust the picture qualities  page 81       If you are using a VCR  make sure the TV VCR button on the remote control is set correctly  page 28       If you have two VCRs connected to your TV  do not connect the same VCR to the TV s output and input  connections at the same time  page 19       Do not connect a standard video cable and an S video cable to VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 on the TV back  or  VIDEO 3 on the TV side  at the same time  Chapter 2     e If you are watching a tuned analog channel  off air broadcast or Cable TV   set the CableClear   DNR  feature to AUTO to reduce visible interference in the TV picture  page 82  
114. ct data                 Note      The auto aspect ratio feature is not applicable to antenna or Cable input  sources      The auto aspect ratio feature is not available when the POP double   window is open  the Freeze mode is active  or the TV Guide On Screen     system is open     To turn on the auto aspect ratio feature   1  Press MENU and open the Video menu   2  Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER     Picture Settings  Advanced Picture Settings  Theater Settings        Sp Navigate     select GL Back EI Exit    3  In the Auto Aspect Ratio field  select On     Theater Settings    Picture Size Natural   Picture Scroll  1             Cinema Mode Film   Auto Aspect Ratio  lt  On  gt   Reset Done    4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER     To turn off the auto aspect ratio feature     Select Off in step 3 above     76 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_069 080_4250HP95 76  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Selecting the cinema mode  480i signals only        When you view a DVD  480i signal  3 2 pulldown processed   from a DVD player connected to the VIDEO 1  VIDEO 2   ColorStream HD1 HD2  component video   or HDMI inputs  on the TV  smoother motion can be obtained by setting the  Cinema Mode to Film     To set the Cinema Mode to Film     1  Press MENU and open the Video menu   2 
115. d HD  Plasma TV      Integrated digital tuning  8VSB ATSC and QAM  eliminates the need for a separate digital converter set top box  in most cases    e TV Guide On Screen    no fee interactive program guide  Chapters 5 and 7    e Digital CableCARD    slot for viewing encrypted digital Cable TV programs  page 13      e Digital recording by connecting a D VHS digital recording device or a Toshiba Symbio    Audio Video Hard Drive Recorder to  one of the IEEE1394 jacks  You can record high definition and standard definition material from either tuner  page 24      e Memory card slots  SD Memory Card  MultiMediaCard  Memory Stick  CompactFlash  xD PictureCard     for viewing JPEG  files as a    slide show     page 90  and for playing MP3 files  page 91         TheaterNet    icons for on screen control of external IR and IEEE1394 devices  page 47      e Two IEEE1394 ports for multi device connection and control  page 23   Note  After you set up the TV Guide  e HDMI  DVI  digital  high definition multimedia interface  page 20   On Screen    system  Chapter 5    7         the program guide opens   e Two sets of ColorStream   HD high resolution component video inputs  pages 16 and 18   automatically by default when      Dolby Digital   page 21  and SRS WOW     page 88  audio technologies  you turn on the TV  You can turn off   Dons   i   the automatic program guide  page  Digital Audio Out optical audio connection  page 21   42  and instead press the TV GUIDE   e CableClear   DNR digi
116. d for reception of high definition  video signals  Because this is an evolving technology  it is possible that  some devices may not operate properly with the TV        Note  To ensure that the HDMI or DVI device is reset  properly  it is recommended that you follow these  procedures       When turning on your electronic components  turn on  the TV first  and then the HDMI or DVI device       When turning off your electronic components  turn off  the HDMI or DVI device first  and then the TV                 Fa    To connect a DVI device  you will need       one HDMI to DVI adapter cable  HDMI type A  connector  per DVI device  For proper operation  the length of an HDMI to DVI adapter  cable should not exceed 9 8 ft  3m   The recommended length  is 6 6 ft  2m     e one pair of standard analog audio cables per DVI  device  An HDMI to DVI adapter cable transfers video only   Separate analog audio cables are required  see  illustration below      See    Setting the HDMI audio mode    on page 52   DVI device          VIDEO AUDIO       NT   T50     DMa w  m          DD es    em  AUDIO    PCIN          5                20 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_013 027_4250HP95 20  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 06 PM    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting a digital audio system       Dolby Digital decoder or    The TV   s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs a Dolby other digital audio system    Digital DOPSLEY  or 2 channel
117. demark of Cable Television Laboratories  Inc   patents and other intellectual property rights  Use of this copyright protection technology   S2 is a trademark   must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited pay per    MMC and MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG and licensed to  view uses only  unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision  Reverse engineering or MMCA  MultiMediaCard Association    disassembly is prohibited    Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation     WOW  SRS and ce  symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs  Inc    xD Picture Card is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co   Ltd     WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs  Inc    Toshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash  and CF logo   registered     Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories     Dolby        Pro Logic    and the trademarks   double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories        8 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_008 009_4250HP95 8 05 9 12  10 05 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Chapter 1  Introduction       Overview of steps for installing  setting up  and using your new TV       Follow these steps to set up your TV and begin using its many exciting features     1     Carefully read the important safety  installation  care   and service information on pages 2 5  Keep this  manual for future reference       Observe the following when choosing a location for 
118. deo  connect an S video cable  plus the audio cables  instead  of the standard video cable  Do not connect an S video cable and  a Standard video cable to VIDEO 1  or VIDEO 2  at the same time  or the picture performance will be unacceptable      Ifyou have a mono VCR  connect L MONO on the TV to your  VCR s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only      When you use a Cable box  you may not be able to use the remote  control to program or access certain features on the TV        To view basic Cable channels and use the TV   s features     Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV   Use the  TV controls  side panel or remote control  to change  channels and access the TV   s features     C  To view basic and premium Cable channels     Turn OFF the VCR  Select the ANT 2 video input source  on the TV   Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4  whichever  channel the Cable box output is set to   Use the Cable box  controls to change channels        To view the VCR     Turn ON the VCR  Select the VIDEO 1 video input source  on the TV      Note  A VIDEO 1 connection with an S Video cable  instead  of a standard video cable  will provide better picture  performance  as mentioned in the first bulleted item at the  top of this page        To select the video input source  press INPUT on the remote control   see page 69   To program the TV remote control to operate other  devices  see Chapter 3        The unauthorized recording  use  distribution  or revision of television  program
119. digital cable subscription service  contact your cable  operator     TV back panel    o  o  o  o  o       INSERT THIS END  gt   Digital CableCARD       DIGITAL   AUDIOOUT    From digital Cable service   connect to ANT 1 only           This cable should be connected to ANT 1 terminal directly  If you connect  the cable via a VCR  the TV may not receive the signals correctly              CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories  Inc     L  To view encrypted digital channels   1  Connect your digital Cable TV cable to ANT 1     2  With the front of the CableCARD    facing up  insert it into  the CableCARD    slot on the back of the TV  see    illustration below left      3  After the CableCARD    is inserted  a CableCARD    option  appears in the Applications menu  with informational  screens provided by your digital CableCARD    service  See  page 53 for additional information     CableCard Connected    Acquiring  channel information     Dp  Applications  TV Guide On Screen _IP Service  Audio Player Conditional Access  Picture Viewer CableCARD tm  Status  Digital CC Audio Selector Network Setup    CableCARD  J CableCARD tm  Pairing    CableCard services will only operate  with cable signal connected to Antenna 1      GpNavigate     Select GM Back  EI Exit    Note     Always use the EJECT button to remove the CableCARD     Never  remove the CableCARD    by hand     Never insert any object or card  including  without limitation  a  PCMCIA card  other than a Cable
120. dio Auto  Slide Show Interval 2 Sec  AVHD Skip Time 15 min  Long Life  gt      5  Navigate     select GEM Back  Uw Exit    3  Press A or W to highlight the Picture Shift  and then press   gt      4  Press A or W to select On        4 Sleep Timer Picture Shift On  gt     On Off Timer Gray Level 1   0n  PC Settings Reverse Off  HDMI Audio Auto White   Slide Show Interval 2 Sec   AVHD Skip Time 15 min    Long Life  gt      ay  LEW ELGI   Select GH Back Exit       To deactivate the picture shift feature   Select Off in step 4 above     NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON  PLASMA DISPLAY  Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma display for    extended periods of time  Fixed  non moving  images  including   but not limited to  PIP POP windows  closed captions  video game    patterns  TV station logos  stock tickers  and websites  and  special formats that do not use the entire screen  can become  permanently ingrained in the Plasma display and cause subtle   but permanent  ghost images  This type of damage is NOT  COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY  See pages 4 and 5 for  details     94 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_089 096_4250HP95 94  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 10 PM       Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Using the Long Life feature  continued        Gray Level    The gray level feature will set the sidebars to three different  levels of darkness  Sidebars are the blank spaces on either side of  a 4 3 viewi
121. dit from VCR 1 to VCR    1 video input source    2     Turn ON both VCRs  Set VCR 2 to the appropriate line  input  refer to your VCR owner   s manual for details   Select  the VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV      Note     e Ifyou have a Cable box  connect the Cable box and splitter to VCR1    as shown on page 15       The VIDEO OUT signal incorporates Macrovision   copyright  protection technology  which may prevent you from recording certain    EK    copy restricted video materials          To select the video input source  press INPUT on the remote control     see page 69   To program the TV remote cont  devices  see Chapter 3       Do not connect the unit through a VCR  Video signa  affected by copyright protection systems and the pictu      This product incorporates copyright protection tech  U S  patents and other intellectual property rights  Use  technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is i  imited pay per view uses only  unless otherwise autho             trademark of Macrovision Corporation     rol to operate other    s fed through VCRs may be  e will be distorted on the TV     nology that is protected by  of this copyright protection  ntended for home and other  rized by Macrovision        Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited  Macrovision is a registered       The unauthorized recording  use  distribution  or       you to civil and criminal liability     programs  videotapes  DVDs  and other materials is prohibited under the  Copyright Law
122. duce the risk of electric shock  do not  use the polarized plug with an extension cord  receptacle  or    other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely  with three wire grounding type to prevent blade exposure           05 9 12  10 05 PM    Installation  cont  from previous page     Care  cont  from previous column        25  Always make sure the antenna system is properly  grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage  surges and built up static charges  see Section 810 of the    National Electric Code  atone adin aie    Antenna discharge unit   NEC Section 810 20           Grounding conductors    Electric service equipment  NEC Section 810 21     Power service groundin    g  Ground clamps electrode system  NEC Art 250 Part H        INJURY OR DEATH    e Use extreme care to make sure you are never in  a position where your body  or any item you are in contact  with  such as a ladder or screwdriver  can accidentally  touch overhead power lines  Never  locate the antenna near overhead  power lines or other electrical  circuits   e Never attempt to install any of the  following during lightning activity   a  an antenna system  or b  cables  wires  or any home  theater component connected to an antenna or phone  system     26  4  DANGER  RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL          Care    For better performance and safer operation of your TOSHIBA  TV  follow these recommendations and precautions        27  If you use the TV in the room of 0  C or less  the picture  br
123. e 78  Using the POP double window feature          wi 78  Switching the speaker audio  main or POP           00000 79  POP double window aspect ratio      cecseessessesteeeeeees 79  Using the FREEZE feature oo    ccscesesesessessssessesesseeseseeneees 80  Using the favorite channel scan feature 0    ceeesseseeseeseees 80  Adjusting the picture wees wo 81  Selecting the picture mode    we 81  Adjusting the picture quality wists ecseeeseseseeseeseees 81  Using CableClear   DNR  digital noise reduction         82  Selecting the color temperature         ccc 82  Using MPEG noise reduction       cecsseseeeseseeeeneeees 83  Using dynamic contrast       cscseesseseeessessesteesteseeneeees 83          Using the closed caption mode      Advanced closed captions                   Digital closed captions      18 85  Adjusting the airdio ssisssststieisesdecciedesisuasense cobs lori tivediursees 86  Muting the sound aiaiaaeo aa 86  Using the digital audio selector      ceeceesseseeeeeeeeees 86  Selecting stereo SAP broadcasts      cccssesseesseeeeeeeeees 86  Adjusting the audio quality              ws 87  Using the StableSound   feature        ceeseeeeeee we 87  Using the SRS WOW    surround sound feature           88  Turning off the built in speakers    88  Selecting the optical audio output format 0    88  Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer MP3 audio  PLAGE ia EA E E GE LAAN 89  Memory card specifications         89  Using the JPEG picture viewer     we 90  Using the MP3 audio p
124. e live program  while continuing to record to the  Toshiba Symbio    AVHD recorder  pages 24 and 52      RECALL displays TV setting information on screen  page 96    MUTE reduces or turns off the sound  page 86    TV VCR selects TV mode to view one program while recording another     SKIP  gt  gt   and  44 jump forward and backward one day in the TV Guide On Screen    listings   Chapter 7      LIST displays the Toshiba Symbio    AVHD recorder play list  if available   page 24    FAV CH AY tunes to the next higher lower favorite channel  page 46    HOME  M  accesses the home function of the Channel Browser    feature  page 71     BACK NEXT P 4     4        While watching TV  these buttons open the channel browser banner and tune    to the previous next channel in the channel history  page 72    Also see    Arrow buttons     on previous page      SPLIT turns the POP feature on and off  page 78  or locks unlocks the TV Guide On Screen       video window   PIC MODE selects the picture mode  page 81    FAV SCAN accesses the favorite channel search function  page 80      FREEZE accesses the freeze feature  page 80         Remote control effctive range       For optimum performance  aim the remote control directly at the TV and make sure there  is no obstruction between the remote control and the TV             Point remote control  30  00 toward remote sensor  on front of TV                 16 4 ft  5m  S    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  29     01E_028
125. e show and return to the picture viewer       press CH RTN     z   e To stop the slide show and return to the regular TV screen     EN i   press EXIT   l EZ      SD Memory Stick       Secure Digital     NS A She J  90 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_089 096_4250HP95 90  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       2  In a few seconds  the images automatically display on   screen  with one as a large picture and six in thumbnail  format      Picture Viewer SD MemoryCard MultiMediaCard                 SideShow ug Ext    5  Press A or W to select another picture as the large picture     6  Press ENTER to view your pictures in a slide show        During the slide show   e To stop on an image during the slide show  press ENTER     05 9 12  10 10 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer MP3 audio player  continued        Using the JPEG picture viewer  continued     To set the slide show interval     Note  The picture viewer must be closed before you can set the  slide show interval     1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   2  Highlight Slide Show Interval and press ENTER  Select the    interval from the menu sidebar  2  5  10  15  or 20  seconds      Installation 2 sec  Sleep Timer 5 sec    On Off Timer 10 sec  PC Settings 15 sec  HDMI Audio Auto 20 sec    Slide Show Interval   2 Sec  gt       v AVHD Skip Time 15 min     a  Navigate     Select Back Exit       To close the picture viewer     Press E
126. eb 213 276    05 9 12  10 08 PM       Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       Navigating the TV Guide On Screen    system  continued        H H TV Guide P  Sal CHET m Or   Video Window Logo ee Sane tat  e When you open the F a pres Mars tom torn cle ke      la  r   A Move   to highlight any show  I V Guide and press Menu for show options    On Screen    system        the current program Saeed Ia    FV TOT  magg    or S  1 1 Dayenn yee OTN   appears   n the Video Giant To1 10 Fan piesi     AAIE  Window  iif an eorna moana  RJA   atSIMFENED PHNOM ENN  e As you scroll through i opt Cable input _ nt ARNE ROIA  R   i   Ye TSI i   Fro zepM  the listings  the Video                    Window will change  to display the selected  program  Info Box    The lock unlock icon indicates the status of the Video Window     You can set the Video Window to remain on a single channel  locked  or to  change channels  unlocked  as you navigate through listings   To lock unlock the Video Window     Press the SPLIT button on the remote control to toggle between locking  and unlocking the Video Window       or      Highlight a channel logo or the LISTINGS Service Bar Label and press  MENU to display the option to lock unlock the Video Window     Panel Menus    e A panel menu appears     Panel Menu              when you press MENU on a highlighted tile  if additional options Default Record Options          are available   or Parmar      when you press ENTER on a show
127. ed to  your home at no cost to you  IN HOME SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN  100 KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT           Rental Units    The warranty for Plasma Television rental units begins on the date of the first  rental or thirty  30  days after the date of shipment to the rental firm   whichever comes first     Limited Warranty for Commercial Units    TCL warrants Plasma Televisions that are sold and used for commercial  purposes as follows  all parts are warranted against defects in materials or  workmanship for a period of ninety  90  days after the date of original retail  purchase  DURING THIS PERIOD  TCL WILL  AT TCLS OPTION  REPAIR  OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED  PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU  ON SITE SERVICE ONLY APPLIES  WITHIN 100 KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT           Owner   s Manual and Product Registration  Read this owner s manual thoroughly before operating this Plasma Television     Register your Plasma Television online at www toshiba ca as soon as  possible  By registering your Plasma Television you will enable TCL to bring  you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to  contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required  Failure to  register your Plasma Television does not diminish your warranty rights     Your Responsibility    THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING   CONDITIONS     1  You must retain your original bill of sale or provide other pr
128. ee    Using the closed caption mode    on page 84  for more information on closed caption modes     VOL Y    RECALL  MUTE       Using the digital audio selector    You can use the Digital CC Audio selector to conveniently  switch between audio tracks on a digital channel  for those  channels that have multiple audio tracks   This temporarily  overrides the audio track chosen by the language option under  Audio Setup  see    Selecting stereo SAP broadcasts     at right      To use the digital audio selector     1  Press MENU and open the Applications menu   2  Highlight Digital CC     Audio Selector and press  ENTER    3  Press A or W to select  Audio  and then press 4  or P to select the desired    Applications  TV Guide On Screen  Audio Player  Picture Viewer  Digital CC Audio Selector    CableCARD    service      Navigate  6  Select Back Exit  Audio  lt  cc1  gt   Closed Caption Service 1    Selecting stereo SAP broadcasts    The multi channel TV sound  MTS  feature allows you to  output high fidelity stereo sound  MTS also can transmit a  second audio program  SAP  containing a second language   music  or other audio information  when provided by individual  stations     The MTS feature is not available when the TV is in VIDEO  mode  When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast  the  word    STEREO    or    SAP    appears on screen when RECALL is  pressed           To listen to stereo sound   1  Press MENU and open the Audio menu   2  Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTE
129. ee Le 23  A  dio  PLAYED o    eeeecseecsseessseescstesssteecsseecsseeesseersutessutessueesuseessseessteeeanteenasees 89 FAV SCAN button    00   ssseeescsseeeccsseesssestesesnseeesenstescenteeeseneessenteeseessess 46  80  Audio quality adjustments            ccecsceecseecsesseesseessetecstecstecntecsteestessseess 87 Factory defaults  restore TV oieinccsetaccncdicitauaes 54  81  Audio system CONNECH  ON            11 11 11111 1151111r 112111111112 ttr ttn ttn etorte tantat 21 Favorite channels       cssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseseceescsssesssssssssee 46  80  AULO ASPOCE veesecerrstsetntntietntnetntntnetntnenetntneietntnetntntneetnentit Features TV yrassa ARE 8  Auto power off    FOCUS maai Aa a NR  AVHD esorestntnstnntntntninninntninntnnnninninneniinnnnnniieneie FREEZE oyiga i ne eer aa a a tee Tre  B Frontot th    TV  20ic   seesas caine ii aana  Bat Ce sera E G LINK    connection       Blocking channels Game Timer sar ees nl ees  Gray evek e eee a eal cea  c HDMI    connection oc eeseeessstecsstecsseeesseeecetessaecsuseecsseeesseeesueeesseessateesees  Cable box connection   215  Fcc   EA E E E ee  CableCARD      essssssessesneuntnnsenensannsnmannnanannannananannannsas PINUPS tor tortortnrtsrontnrtortorenr torentan torenta eae  CableClear   DNR    ssssessssssesssseeesssseetnsseetnnsteeinseeennseseninaseetnnettenneet BML aie ai eee et tte eae nesta  CADE S gona ee re ee tee eee ate he ate Installation  care  and Service cesssssssscsssssssssssssssssssssssssssss
130. eed to be visible to operate it remotely        You will need    gt  one dual wand IR blaster cable  included with your TV      gt  other audio video cables as required to connect the device s     to the TV  see pages 14 21  pies    To connect the IR blaster cable  A  IR blaster cable wand   approx  1 inch from device               1  Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your device  This  sensor is marked on some devices      2  Align one of the IR blaster cable   s wands about 1 inch away TV back panel    from the infrared sensor on the front of the device and  attach it using double sided mounting tape  If you have a  second device  attach the second wand in a similar manner    See illustration at right     Note  lf you do not have a second device  coil the second wand  with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV     VIDEO    3  Plug the IR blaster cable   s plug into one of the TV   s  TheaterNet OUT terminals                 SS    Th    To control the device s   m                   Point the TV remote control     programmed to operate the device  see  Chapter 3  or the device   s remote  control at the front of the TV and press  the button for the desired function   S    The signal passes from the remote  control through the TV to the device  via the IR blaster cable   Note     Ifyou use the device s remote control to                                   TheaterNet    on screen device control                               operate the device  you also will need to Fo
131. eeeeeees 24  TEEE1394 device management        ccssesseeseseeeeeeees 25  G LINK    connection w  ceecseesseesseseesesseseesessesseassseeseseeneees 26  Connecting a personal computer  PC  oo  seeeeseeeeeseees 27  Chapter 3  Using the remote control          sssscseeeeneneeees 28  Learning about the remote control w    c cessseseesesseseeseeseees 28  Remote control effective range wc  cece eesesseseesesseees 29  Installing the remote control batteries        cscseesesseeeeees 30    Using the remote control MODE button to control        your other devices  Remote Control functional key chart       Programming the remote control to operate  VOULOLNER CEVICES state e RE E TEER E 33  Devic   code setip xicaverssieeccassessteesorscvunascromecesseeeute 33  Searching and sampling the code of a device  8500      33  Using the volume lock feature  8000   Operational feature reset  8900                Multi brand remote control device codes            Chapter 4  Menu layout and navigation       Main menu layouten enrete  Setup Installation menu layout     Navigating the menu system        scsessesesesseseseesesseseesesneees              Chapter 5  TV Guide On Screen    setup         sssssesesseeeeees 39  Setting up the TV Guide On Screen    system     we 39  TV Guide On Screen    Reminder oo    42   Turning off the TV Guide On Screen    automatic  display features sociiscsesncetstsovecedcastedershevsrieveluedi teneeers 42  Chapter 6  Setting up your TV    43  Selecting the menu language 
132. een    system  Chapter 7      TV GUIDE opens the TV Guide On Screen    system  Chapter 7      INFO provides detailed information on highlighted items in the TV Guide  On Screen    system  Chapter 7      ENTER activates highlighted items in the main menu system and the  TV Guide On Screen    system     Arrow buttons  AV  lt  gt   When a menu is on screen  these buttons select or      BACK NEXT  adjust programming menus   Also see g 4  g P on the next page      CH AY cycles through programmed channels when no menu is on screen   page 44   functions as page up down when a menu is on screen or when  the TV Guide On Screen    system is open  Chapter 7      VOL AY adjusts the volume level     EXIT closes on screen menus and the TV Guide On Screen    system     23 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved         01E_02   036_4250HP95 28  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    DTV  e 2 CBLISAT    3 VCRIPVR    4 DVD    5 AUDIO1    6 AUDIO2    Se  DVD CLEAR    S    LOW    COICO Gs     REW __PAUSE STEP PLAY     G0    I     AM FM STOP REC         mI                       TOSHIBA  CT 90233    Note  The error message    Not  Available    will appear if you press a  key for a function that is not available    05 9 12  10 06 PM         Chapter 3  Using the remote control       Learning about the remote control  continued        CH RTN returns to the last viewed channel  page 73   or stops the picture viewer slide show   page 90      Live returns viewing of the TV back to th
133. een    system  continued        Screen 12  Do you have an antenna connected  Screen 16  The on screen diagram shows the correct way to  Select either Yes or No  and then press ENTER  Screen 13 connect your VCR to the G LINK    terminal on the TV   appears  Make sure the G LINK    cable is installed properly  For   additional details  see page 26    Press ENTER to display screen 17     Note   f you selected NO in screen 3  you must select YES in  this screen to receive a channel lineup and program listings     with correct program Ewings  the TV Guele On  no know yeu Rave atch an ante    Soren  tio your TV tn receive             Screen 13  Are the settings correct   If you select Yes  screen 14 appears   If you select No  screen 1 appears     Screen 17  Select your VCR brand  and then press ENTER   Screen 18 appears     TY EENT  ame     To Gymrate properly with your VOR tee TV Guate On Scrven vyuem mechs ta  Mo what brand of VOR i commected to your TV  An tortent brand  SCION may et programa rocada erron  Yas ar mmea tatana Voge 0n Srpen ayate wter if    yOu wil not be abie to use that feature     What brand of VCR is connected to this TV   Gay Box yelected code Ot    an gi    Antenna Inpa     Cable box on iput    Cable input  7  VOR code 007  Admirat    Not Usted  Jamani          Vea end setup  Wo  repeat wetup process          apa Tisai rR an Pewter          Screen 18  Turn on your VCR  insert a tape  either blank or    Screen 14  Congratulations  You have completed basic pr
134. eriods of time  Fixed  non     i         moving  images  including  but not limited to  PIP   lf you use the TV s remote control to start recording  you will not be able to open the POP window ff pop wind ows  closed captions  video game    and the message    Not Available    will appear on screen  patterns  TV station logos  stock tickers  and    It is recommended that you use the TV s remote control to start recording  Ifyou use a device other f Websites  and special formats that do not use the  entire screen  can become permanently ingrained    than the TVs remote control to start recording  you may be able to open the POP window during in the Plasma display and cause subtle  but   the recording process  If this happens  the recorded audio will reflect the audio of the active window ff permanent  ghost images  This type of damage    main or POP   which may not be the audio you intended to record  is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY  See  pages 4 and 5 for details        78 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_069 080_4250HP95 78 05 9 12  10 09 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Using the POP features  continued        Switching the speaker audio  main or POP     While the POP window is open  press or P to switch the sound  main or POP  that  is output from the TV speakers  and from the VARIABLE AUDIO OUT terminals      The window with the active sound is outlined with a green border     Example  
135. es  included with your TV  from your VCR and Cable box  if applicable  to the G LINK    terminal on the TV     Note  TV Guide On Screen    program data is available through the ANT 1 and ANT 2 antenna inputs and also through the VIDEO 1 inputs if you  have a cable box connected to VIDEO 1  TV Guide On Screen    program data is not available through any other inputs on this TV  See the  connection information on pages 14 27  The G LINK    connection is necessary to enable the following features of your TV Guide On Screen    system   e Ifyou have a Cable box  you need to connect the G LINK    cable from the Cable box to the G LINK    terminal to receive the  TV Guide On Screen    program listings for your Cable service     e If you have a VCR  you need to connect the G LINK    cable from the VCR to the G LINK    terminal to use the TV Guide  On Screen    recording features     To connect to the G LINK    terminal     1  Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your VCR or  Cable box  The sensor is marked on some devices      2  Align one of the G LINK     IR blaster  cable   s wands about    1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of the  VCR and attach it using double sided mounting tape     Front of Cable box            Front of VCR  If you have a Cable box  attach the other wand in a similar con Se    manner   See illustration at right            Note  If you do not have a Cable box  coil the second wand  with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV   Infrared  
136. eviously recorded   and then press PLAY  Screen 19    TV Guide On Screen    system setup     appears      i i   Ty rrey    Note  Read the on screen information regarding the amount Taa O n mana ran atamla eede  of time it may take for listing information to download from  the TV Guide On Screen    service     Follow steps A and B below   Press ENTER to display screen 15  fle pen Puy  top eta    have completed the setup of your TV Guide On Screen  yen Up Up to date itis wil ba   Inading aver the next  hen your TV is power      emake takn more than one day tos all eight days at t latinga  pdate  During this period feet tree ti use your TV        will automatically receive updates during the faites  hen your TY is turned off    u Uru have shanged the lacation or cate co  tigwation  will rocoive any changes to your focal  lt   atu       Screen 19  The TV Guide On Screen    system will test the code  for the brand of VCR you selected  Do not press any keys   on the TV  remote control  or VCR until the testing process   is completed  When testing is completed  screen 20 appears     Frew brewer tir pinan        Screen 15  Is a VCR connected   If you select Yes  screen 16 appears   If you select No  screen 21 appears     Wow testing code 007  Admiral   honar to th   an no the TV Giuda ON Screw system       CSE recordings using We ore taa yecovrting  feature    recording    Would Fou Hie 00 ane TY Seas On Seren DOTO  Ver setup VCR comol O             Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORAT
137. ew episode       Watch TV and display TV Guide On Screen    information  simultaneously     e Channel lineup customization   Customize your channel  lineup so your favorite stations are listed first     e Direct tuning   Directly tune the TV to a current program  you want to watch by selecting it in the program guide    e Reminders   Schedule show reminders that will either display  an on screen notification banner or automatically tune the TV  to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder    e Recording   Easily schedule recording of one or more  programs    Note  A VCR or IEEE1394 recording device is required for recording   It is recommended that you connect your devices according to the  instructions in Chapter 2    e Search   Search for shows by category  keyword  or  alphabetically    e On screen help   The TV Guide On Screen    system contains    on screen feature definitions and navigation instructions        To open the TV Guide On Screen    system   e While watching TV  press    TV GUIDE on the P  remote control    3    TV Guide On Screen  ni a Audio Player    Picture Viewer  Digital CC Audio Selector  CableCARD    e Press MENU  open the  Applications menu   highlight TV Guide  On Screen     and press  ENTER      3  Navigate  6  Select Back Exit       Note  After setting up the TV Guide On Screen    system  the program  guide opens automatically by default when you turn on the TV  To turn          off this feature  see page 42              Setting up the
138. f Canada or  any province thereof is hereby limited to ninety  90  days from the date you  discover  or should have discovered  the defect  This limitation does not  apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any province of Canada     THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY  ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM PROVINCE TO  PROVINCE IN CANADA  SOME PROVINCES OF CANADA DO NOT  ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED  WARRANTY  WHEN AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT  OR THE  EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  DAMAGES  THEREFORE  THE ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY    TO YOU UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES    0705     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  1 09     01E_107 111_4250HP95 109  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 11 PM    Chapter 11  Appendix       A copy of the GPL source code in this product may be obtained by  contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at  800 631 3811  There will be a  charge to cover the costs of providing the source code     A copy of the LGPL source code in this product may be obtained by  contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at  800 631 3811  There will be a  charge to cover the costs of providing the source code     USB Protocol Copyright    2005 The NetBSD Foundation  Inc  All rights  reserved     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without  modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions are  met    1  Redistributions o
139. f source code must retain the above copyright notice   his list of conditions and the following disclaimer    2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice   his list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation  and or other materials provided with the distribution    3  Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its  contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from  his software without specified prior written permission        THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION  INC   AND CONTRIBUTORS    AS IS    AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED  WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT   INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR CONSEQUENTIAL  DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  PROCUREMENT OF  SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR PROFITS   OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY  THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR  TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY  WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in   the OpenSSL Toolkit  http   www openssl org     This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young    eay crypts
140. f the United  States and other countries  and may  subject you to civil and criminal liability     NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE  EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY    Avoid displaying stationary images on your  Plasma display for extended periods of  time  Fixed  non moving  images   including  but not limited to  PIP POP  windows  closed captions  video game  patterns  TV station logos  stock tickers   and websites  and special formats that do  not use the entire screen  can become  permanently ingrained in the Plasma  display and cause subtle  but permanent   ghost images  This type of damage is  NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY   See pages 4 and 5 for details        75    05 9 12  10 09 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Scrolling the TheaterWide  picture   TheaterWide 2 and 3 only        You can set separate scroll settings for the TheaterWide 2 and  TheaterWide 3 modes input   To set the scroll settings     1  Press INPUT on the remote control or TV VIDEO on the  TV to select the input for which you want to set the picture  size and scroll settings     2  Press MENU and open the Video menu   3  Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER     Picture Settings    Advanced Picture Settings  Theater Settings        a  Navigate     Select Back Exit    4  In the Picture Size field  select either TheaterWide 2 or  TheaterWide 3  you cannot scroll in any other mode      5  Press W to highlight the Picture Scroll field     6  Press or P to scroll the picture up and down as needed  
141. ff  CableClear Auto  Color Temperature Cool  Reset Done    4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER     Note    lf you select one of the factory set picture modes  Sports   Standard  or Movie  and then set the dynamic contrast to    On      the picture mode automatically changes to Preference in the  Picture Settings menu     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  33     01E_081 088_4250HP95 83    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Using the closed caption mode       The closed caption mode has two options     e Captions   An on screen display of the dialog  narration   and sound effects of TV programs and videos that are    closed captioned  usually marked    CC    in program guides      e Text   An on screen display of information not related to  the current program  such as weather or stock data  when  provided by individual stations     To view captions or text   1  Press MENU and open the Preferences menu     2  Highlight Closed Caption Mode and then press to open  the menu sidebar     3  Press W to highlight the desired closed caption mode and  then press ENTER     Favorite Channels  Closed Caption Mode Off     Closed Caption Advanced    Input Labeling  Menu Language English  Home CH Setup       e To view captions   Highlight CC1   CC2  CC3  or  CC4   CC1 displays  translation of the  primary la
142. fo Action Bar    e An Info Box for a program in the LISTINGS screen can have up to three  sizes  Small  Large  or    No               Press INFO on the remote control to cycle among the sizes         The default Info Box size is Small  To change the default size  open the  SETUP Service screen  see page 68         The Info Button icon     INFO   appears on the Info Action Bar if the Info  Box size can change and or if there are additional Info screens  Press INFO  on the remote control to change the size and or to display additional Info  screens           e In some instances  the INFO button on the remote control is used to page  forward  for example  if there are additional pages of information in a Panel  Ad  a Channel Ad  or help text      Large Info Box       TV Guide On Screen    Icons    ICON NAME DESCRIPTION             INFO Info Button    Additional Info Box information is available  or the Info Box has additional sizes        8 00 zr i000 ProgressBar e   Elapsed time in current show   e Progress bar appears in LISTINGS and SEARCH and when the Info Button is pressed while watching TV                          K a HDTV e Show is presented in high definition TV  if available    News New   Show is new  not a repeat     al Stereo e Show is available in stereo    Of  pote Dolby Digital    Show is available with Dolby Digital 5 1 audio  digital channels only    ce CC   Closed captioning is available for the show    H TV Rating e TV rating for the show    dJ    Record Once  
143. from the memory  you must  manually delete it  see next page        To tune the TV to a channel not programmed in the channel  memory  you must use the Channel Number buttons on the  remote control      Programming channels for an antenna input configured for  CABLE will take substantially longer than for an antenna input  configured for ANTENNA  This is normal  however  once  channel programming is completed  you should not have to  repeat the programming process again unless your Cable TV  service lineup changes significantly      Ifyou have a CableCARD    inserted  page 13   channel  programming for ANT 1 is disabled because the CableCARD     automatically loads the Cable channel list into the TV s channel  memory     To program channels automatically     1  Make sure you have configured the antenna input sources   See page 43 for details    2  Press MENU and open the Setup menu    3  Highlight Installation and press ENTER   A new set of          4  Open the Terrestrial menu  highlight Channel Program   and press ENTER     5  Highlight ANT 1 or  ANT 2  depending on      i 7  Terrestrial    which antenna input  Input Configuration  you want to program Channel Program  gt   Chi   Add Delet  channels for  and then eae  press ENTER to start  automatic channel  programming          A ANT1 Antenna  Scanning channels  please wait      TS 20        The TV will automatically cycle through all the channels  for the antenna input you selected  and store all active  channels in the ch
144. git PIN code    LE LS ES EJ          If you cannot remember your  PIN code       While the PIN code entering screen is displayed  press RECALL  four times within five seconds  The PIN code will be reset and  you can enter a new PIN code        Changing your PIN code       1  Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon    2  Press W to display the PIN code entering screen    3  Enter your four digit PIN code and press ENTER    4  Press W to highlight New PIN Code and press ENTER     Enable Rating Blocking    Edit Rating Limits  Channels Block    Input Lock    Front Panel Lock  Game Timer  New PIN Code     i Navigate     select GE Back BI Exit    5  Press the Number buttons to enter a new four digit code   Retype the numbers to confirm the PIN code you entered     6  Press ENTER  The new PIN code is now active     New PIN Code    Please enter a 4 digit PIN code    Confirm PIN code       Cancel Done  Cancel Done   If the wrong PIN code is entered  the message    Incorrect PIN  code  please try again     appears  Highlight Retry and press  ENTER  Enter the code again and press ENTER   When the correct PIN code is entered  the Locks menu opens     Enable Rating Blocking off  gt    Edit Rating Limits   Channels Block   Input Lock   Front Panel Lock   Game Timer   New PIN Code   Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  97     01E_097 100_4250HP95 97  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 10 PM    Chapter 9  Using the Locks menu       Blocking TV prog
145. hannel display    section in the TV Guide    On Screen    owner   s manual  see page 67        Why are some of my channels listed on the wron  y y 8  number     A  There are several possibilities  see page 67 for details      Nir    a  Incorrect channel lineup was selected  Access    Change  system settings    and choose    Yes  but my channel lineup is    incorrect     and then reselect the correct lineup     b    wa    Channel lineup changes have not yet been processed  Use  the    Change channel display    feature to make adjustments          c  Initial setup was done incorrectly  that is  the wrong    ZIP postal code was entered   Redo the initial setup     Q  Why doesn   t the program highlighted match up with    the video window on my TV screen   A  There are several possibilities  see page 67 for details      a  The station in question made a late change to its scheduled  program listing and the TV Guide On Screen    system has  not yet been updated     b  The TV is receiving broadcasts through a modified or  boosted antenna system or a satellite dish  not supported  by the TV Guide On Screen    system      c  Initial setup was done incorrectly   i e   the wrong  ZIP postal code was entered   Redo the initial setup     d  Incorrect channel lineup was selected  Access    Change  system settings    and choose    Yes  but my channel lineup  is incorrect     and then reselect the correct lineup   see page    67 for details    e  The video window may be locked  Press SPLIT 
146. have not set up the TV Guide On Screen    system   the following screen will appear  To set the time  highlight  TV Guide On Screen    and press ENTER  The TV Guide  On Screen    setup sequence will start  and the time and  date will be set automatically     Time And Date    Your TV Guide On Screen system can provide accurate  time and date information     It is recommended you set up TV Guide On Screen  first and use it to obtain the time and date     Manual TV Guide On Screen Cancel    If you have already set up the TV Guide On Screen     system  or if you have not set up the time  the time and  date setting screen will appear  set the time and date  manually     Time And Date    Date  MM DD YY  0 6 73 0 0 5  Time  HH MM  1121 1  AM  Cancel Done  Note       Ifyou highlight TV Guide On Screen     above  to set the time and  date through the TV Guide On Screen    system and a power  outage occurs  the time and date will be updated automatically  when the power is restored       Ifyou highlight Manual  above  to set the time and date manually  and a power outage occurs  you will lose the time and date settings  when the power is restored       Ifyou manually set the time and date and then perform TV Guide  On Screen    setup  the manual time and date settings will be  overridden by the TV Guide On Screen    settings     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     05 9 12  10 08 PM       Chapter 6  Setting up your TV       Viewing the CableCARD    menu    Vie
147. he    Change  channel display    feature to turn ON or OFF additional  channels    Note  Even though you have the option of enabling many  more channels  the system may not have the memory capacity  to hold detailed program descriptions for all of them     15  Q  When I opened the TV Guide On Screen    system  I was  asked to choose from more than one channel lineup     What should I do     A  Select the lineup that most closely matches the one for your  area  If after you choose the lineup  you want to make  changes to it  highlight Setup in the Service Bar  Press V to  select Change Channel Display  Follow the on screen  instructions     16  Q  Why do all my channels display    No Listing       A  The TV Guide On Screen    system has not yet received its  data download  The phrase    No Listing    will be replaced  with program information during the next download cycle   which will occur within the next 24 hour period     17  Q  Why do some of my channels display    No Listing       A  There are several possibilities    a  The channels in question were recently turned ON  in  Change channel display  and TV Guide On Screen    has  yet to receive its next data download    b  After completing the initial setup  the first data download  of the day was interrupted by a VCR recording    c  The TV power cord was left unplugged for an extended  period of time and the TV Guide On Screen    system was  unable to receive program listings during the scheduled  download cycle    d  Poo
148. he    S    number  the faster the  device  If your device is not marked with an    S    number  look in the  device   s user manual or call the device manufacturer s technical  support number       If your IEEE1394 device has a two position power  switch  always place the device at the end of the chain  and turn ON the power switch when any device is used   If the power switch is OFF  it will interfere with signals from devices  behind it in the chain       The maximum length for an  EEE1394 cable between  each device is 15 feet       This TV is an IEEE1394A device  The IEEE1394B protocol is faster  and intended to allow for longer distances between devices and  multi room systems   EEE1394A to IEEE1394B converters   available at some electronics suppliers  may allow compatibility of   EEE1394B devices with your existing IEEE1394A devices       The transmission capability of EEE1394 cable used with this TV  must be S400  400 Mbps maximum            05 9 12  10 06 PM    25    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       G LINK    connection          This connection is necessary for the TV Guide On Screen    system to work with your cable box to receive program listings and to  enable the TV Guide On Screen    recording features with your VCR        This connection is not necessary for AVHD or D VHS recording devices  See pages 24 and 52 for further details     After you connect your devices to the TV  you will need to connect the G LINK    cable  either of the dual wand IR blaster cabl
149. hedule is available                    Turning off the TV Guide On Screen     automatic display feature    After you set up the TV Guide On Screen    system  the  program guide will display automatically  by default  when    you turn on the TV  To turn off the automatic program guide     1  Press TV GUIDE on the remote control to open the  TV Guide On Screen    system  if it is not already open      2  Use the  lt  gt  buttons to select the Setup menu     3  Use the AV buttons to select    Change Default Options      and then press ENTER     4  Use the AW buttons to select    General Defaults     and  then press ENTER     5  Set the    Auto Guide    option to Off     6  Use the AV buttons to select Done  and then press  ENTER                 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     05 9 12  10 07 PM       6  Setting up your TV    For menu navigation instructions  see Chapter 4        Selecting the menu language       You can choose from three different languages  English  French  and Spanish  for the on screen display of menus and messages    The TV Guide On Screen    menus are in English  regardless of  the language selected in this menu      To select the menu language   1  Press MENU and open the Preferences menu     2  Highlight Menu Language and press P     3  Highlight your preferred menu language in the menu  sidebar and press ENTER     Favorite Channels English  Closed Caption Mode Off Frangais  Closed Caption Advanced Espa  ol  Input Labeling   
150. ide       TV Guide On Screen    Services  continued        SEARCH screen  continued     Example  Keyword search 6  A list of all matching shows for that keyword is displayed     Keyword search lets you enter a word s  to find a particular  show by category or for every show title that matches   1  From the SEARCH screen  highlight KEYWORD  and  then press ENTER       Highlight NEW SEARCH in the panel menu  and then  press ENTER     N          7  Highlight a show and press ENTER to display all airings   Then highlight a specific listing and press ENTER to watch   if on now  or press MENU to display the Episode Options  panel menu  From the Episode Options menu  you can  choose to set a recording or reminder  or tune to the  channel  see    Episode Options panel menu    on page 59         3  The Search Options panel menu opens  Highlight  CATEGORY  and then use the arrow keys to highlight a  category to search  All  HDTV  Children  Sports  etc       4  After highlighting a category  press W to highlight ENTER  KEYWORD  and then press ENTER           The TV Guide On Screen    system stores all the keywords you   create    To edit or delete a keyword   From the SEARCH KEYWORD screen  highlight the  keyword you want to edit or delete  and then press MENU  to display the Search Options panel menu  with the  following options        5  The keyboard is displayed  Use the arrow keys to highlight    a character and then press ENTER to display it  When   GO TO SERVICE BAR  Closes the me
151. ide 2  TheaterWide 3   and Full   as described below and on the next page    The way the image displays in any of the picture sizes will vary  depending on the format of the program you are viewing  Select  the picture size that displays the current program the way that  looks best to you     Your picture size preferences can be saved for each input on your    TV     To select the picture size   1  Press PIC SIZE on the remote control   2  While the Picture Size menu is on screen  press the    corresponding number button  0 4  to select the desired  picture size     Picture Size      Natural    TheaterWide 1      TheaterWide 2     TheaterWide 3  JO Full         O   GSB to Select       Note       You also can repeatedly press PIC SIZE to select the desired  picture size  or press AW on the remote control while the  Picture Size screen is open           Full    may not be available for some program formats  it will  be    grayed out    in the Picture Size screen      Natural picture size    e The image is displayed close to its originally formatted  proportion  Some program formats will display with  sidebars and or bars at the top and bottom     COOOL Jooo  ooo foco       vv      2 CBLISAT    SVCRIPVR    4 DVD      S AUDIOL    G AUDIOZ Numbers  Ges 7 PIC SIZE  m 0O  r   A   Vv    Note     You also can select the picture size using the  menu system  Select Picture Size in the Video   Theater Settings menu  Select the input for  which you want to save your picture settings  To  
152. ight a rating  a definition for the HERP ges   rating appears at the bottom of the screen  See notes at  right  Note    8  When done selecting the ratings you want to block    Ifyou place an    X    in the box next to    None    Rated or    No Rating      highlight Done and press ENTER  programs rated    None    or    No Rating    will be blocked  However  if  EA the program does not provide any rating information  nothing will be   RE as V Movies displayed in the banner and ratings blocking will not take effect   de   pb Sh ae         To display the rating of the program you are watching  press      o o o ti AE      ano nn PGs   RECALL on the remote control  If it is not rated  the word    NONE  EVP e HOG AR appears   ETVv 14 e OHH MNc 17  ETV MA e e OOO Wx Cancel   None  Rated or  No Rating  Done TV PG L V   NONE    This program is designed for children age 7 and adove   98 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_097 100_4250HP95 98  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 10 PM    Chapter 9  Using the Locks menu       Blocking channels    Unlocking programs temporarily       With the Channels Block feature  you can block specific  channels  You will not be able to tune blocked channels unless  you clear the setting first     To block channels   1  Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon     2  Press W to displays the  PIN code entering screen     Enable Rating Blocking Off    3  Enter your four digit    PIN code and press ea  ENT
153. ightness may vary until the plasma monitor warms up  This  is not a sign of a malfunction        28  Always unplug the TV before  cleaning   Wipe the display panel surface  gently using only the supplied  wiping cloth or a soft cloth   cotton  flannel  etc    A hard  cloth may damage the surface  of the panel  Avoid contact with alcohol  thinner  benzene   acidic or and alkaline solvent cleaners  abrasive cleaners   or chemical cloths  as the surface may be impaired              Never spill liquids or push objects of any kind    29  WARNING  RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK   AN into the TV cabinet slots         01E_002 004_4250HP95 4  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       30  While it is thundering  do not touch the connecting cables  or apparatus        31  For added protection of your TV from lightning and power  surges  always unplug the power cord and disconnect the  antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or  unused for long periods of time        32  During normal use  the TV may make occasional snapping  or popping sounds  This is normal  especially when the  unit is being turned on or off  If these sounds become  frequent or continuous  unplug the power cord and  contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center        33  Possible Adverse Effects on Plasma Display  If a fixed  non moving  pattern or image remains on the  Plasma display for extended periods of time  the image  can become permanently ingrained in the plasma panel of  the TV and cause subtle but permane
154. igital or analog   will be locked on the channel that is currently recording     Tuning to a specific channel   programmed or unprogrammed     Tuning analog channels     Press the Channel Number buttons  0 9  on the remote  control  For example  to select channel 125  press 1  2  5     Tuning digital channels     Press the Channel Number buttons  0 9  on the remote  control  followed by the      dash  button and then the sub   channel number  For example  to select digital channel 125 1   press 1  2  5       1   Note  If a digital channel is not programmed    either through  the automatic channel scan  page 44  or the channel add   delete function  page 45    you will have to tune the RF  channel using the Channel Number and Dash buttons on the  remote control        Switching between two channels using  Channel Return    The Channel Return feature allows you to switch between two  channels without entering an actual channel number each time     1  Select the first channel you want to view     2  Select a second channel using the Channel Number buttons   and the dash       button if selecting a digital channel      3  Press CH RTN on the remote control  The previous  channel will display  Each time you press CH RTN  the TV  will switch back and forth between the last two channels  that were selected     Note       Ifyou press CH RTN from a non antenna input  the TV will  return to the last viewed ANT input and channel      Ifyou are currently recording a program  this feature
155. inals when the  appropriate input mode is selected        The unauthorized recording  use  distribution  or revision of television  programs  videotapes  DVDs  and other materials is prohibited under the  Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries  and may subject  you to civil and criminal liability                 Connecting a camcorder       You will need      gt  one set of standard A V cables  For better picture performance  if your camcorder has S video  use an    S video cable  plus the audio cables  instead of the standard video cable   Do not connect both an S video cable and a standard video cable to VIDEO    3 at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable     C To view the camcorder video   Select the VIDEO 3 video input source on the TV        To select the video input source  press INPUT on the remote control  see page 69      To program the TV remote control to operate other devices  see Chapter 3     14     01E_013 027_4250HP95 14  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    One roll  Noise filters  supplied     VIDEO 3 inputs on  TV left side panel       Camcorder       HEADPHONE  HEADPHONE    One roll    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     05 9 12  10 05 PM    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting a VCR and Cable box       You will need    gt  one signal splitter   gt  five coaxial cables   gt  two sets of standard A V cables    e For better picture performance from your VCR  If your VCR has  S vi
156. indow    Menu Language     English   Fran  ais   Espa  ol  Home CH Setup       Home CH Setup Window      Channels Block       Channels Block Edit Window     Input Lock     Off   Video   Video    Front Panel Lock  gt  Off   On   GameTimer        Off   30 Min   60 Min   90 Min   120 Min  New PIN Code       New PIN Code Entry Window      Installation      Installation sub menu is launched  see page 38 for details     Sleep Timer  gt    Sleep Timer Edit Window    On Off Timer       On Off Timer window    PC settings      PC Settings Edit Window    HDMI Audio  gt  Auto   Digital   Analog  Slide Show Interval     2 sec    5 sec    10 sec    15 sec    20 sec   AVHD Skip Time     gt  1 min    3 min    5 min    15 min   Long Life Picture Shift  gt  On   Off  Gray Level  gt  1 2 83    Enable Rating Blocking  gt  Off   On  A Locks Edit Rating Limits  gt    Edit Rating Limits Edit Window    ei  Setup      Reverse  White  Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  37   01E_037 038_4250HP95 37 05 9 12  10 06 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Chapter 4  Menu layout and navigation       Setup   Installation menu layout       To open the Installation menu  illustrated below   press MENU on the remote control or TV side panel  open the Setup menu  select  Installation  and press ENTER     From Main Menu Setup  menu  select    Installation       sub menu              gt  Hth    ni  E    Input Configuration      Input Configuration Window      Terrestrial Channel Progra
157. input source you want to  view        The following are examples of the TheaterNet on screen  control icons for various devices     Toshiba Symbio    AVHD Recorder control   Time Shift Control  Ht 00 01 l  Live TV      8  Skip Live JT a         If you connected a Toshiba Symbio  AVHD Recorder  you  must set up the TV Guide On Screen    system in order to use  the Symbio   s full functionality  See Chapter 5 for details on  setting up the TV Guide On Screen    system  See pages 24  and 52 for further details about AVHD digital recorders     TheaterNet  A     Video 2   Video 3  oa Toshiba    Toshiba    ColorStream HD1    ColorStream HD2    EA Toshiba 2  Toshiba  v          48 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_046 054_4250HP95 48  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 07 PM    Chapter 6  Setting up your TV    TheaterNet  IR device codes    Amplifiers  Brand  Aiwa   Bose  Carver  Curtis Mathes  Denon   GE  Harman Kardon  Jvc   Left Coast  Linn  Luxman  Magnavox  Marantz  NEC  Nakamichi  Optimus  Panasonic  Parasound  Philips  Pioneer  Polk Audio  RCA  Realistic  Sansui  Shure   Sony  Soundesign  Technics  Victor  Wards  Yamaha    Cable boxes  Brand  ABC    Americast   Bell  amp  Howell   Bell South   Contec   Director   Everquest   Gemini   General Instrument    GoldStar  Hamlin  Hitachi  Hytex  Jasco    Jerrold    Memorex  Motorola    Oak   Pace  Panasonic  Paragon  Philips    Pioneer    Pulsar    Quasar        01E_046 054_4250HP95 
158. iptions of the buttons     e Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within LISTINGS GO TO SERVICE BAR  Closes the menu  changes no  to do the following  information  and returns to the Service Bar         View eight days of show listings TUNE TO CHANNEL   WATCH NOW  Exits the TV Guide      Read show descriptions On Screen    system and tunes to the channel of the highlighted  show  if the show airs in the future  or tunes to the show  if the  show is currently airing   The button label changes according to  whether the show is currently airing or not     SET RECORDING  Displays the Record Options panel menu   from which you can set the show to record  For additional          E ATT Ve DEH rrr SUF STAI Orr ERATO mr  oo        m      _         _    a A   lt 4    eC     La Losey information  see    SCHEDULE screen    and    Record features          on page 63     GOS Cara Ferma Trill Apr iat       SET REMINDER  Displays the Remind Options panel menu   from which you can set a reminder for the show  For additional  information  see    SCHEDULE screen    on page 63 and     Remind features    on page 65         Tune directly to a show currently airing      Set a show to Remind  e g   start time  frequency  automatic  power ON  auto tune TV         Set a show to Record  e g  start end time  frequency         Lock and unlock the Video Window CANCEL  Closes the menu  changes no information  and    returns to the highlighted show            Access panel ads and channel ads    Copyrigh
159. it sexual activity  V  Graphic violence       Parents Strongly Cautioned  This program contains some  material that many parents would find unsuitable for children  under 14 years of age     D  Intensely suggestive dialog L  Strong  coarse language  S  Intense sexual situations V  Intense violence       Parental Guidance Suggested  This program contains  material parents may find unsuitable for younger children    D  Some suggestive dialog L  Infrequent coarse language  S  Some sexual situations V  Moderate violence          General Audience  Most parents would find this program  suitable for all ages         Directed to Older Children  This program is designed  for children age 7 and above  Note  Programs in which  fantasy violence may be more intense or more combative  than other programs in this category are designated Y7FV            All Children  This program is designed to be appropriate for  all children         Description and content themes       X rated  For adults only        Not intended for anyone 17 and under       Restricted  Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult        Parents Strongly Cautioned  Some material may be  inappropriate for children under 13        Parental Guidance Suggested  Some material may not be                7  Press AVP and then press ENTER to select the level of suitable for children    blocking you prefer  A box with an    X  is a rating that will     ery   Sie General Audience  Appropriate for all ages  be blocked  As you highl
160. ital  ATSC  off air antenna  signals and analog and digital  QAM  Cable TV signals    Note   f you have an antenna only  connect it to ANT 1  Ifyou have  both cable TV and an antenna  connect the cable TV to ANT 1 and  the antenna to ANT 2     HDMI    IN     High Definition Multimedia Interface input  receives digital audio and uncompressed digital video from  an HDMI device or uncompressed digital video from a DVI  device  See page 20        DIGITAL AUDIO OUT     Optical audio output in Dolby  Digital or PCM  pulse code modulation  format for  connecting an external Dolby Digital decoder  amplifier   A V receiver  or home theater system with optical audio  input  See page 21     G LINK        For use with one of the enclosed IR blaster   G LINK    cables to enable the TV Guide On Screen     recording features  See page 26        2  IEEE1394     Two bi directional digital IEEE1394 ports  for connecting multiple devices with compressed digital  video  Because these ports are bi directional  they can be  used for playback and recording  You can control your  TEEE1394 devices using the TV   s TheaterNet on screen  device control icons  See pages 23 25 and 47    Note   EEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information   separate audio cables are not required       CableCARD  slot     For use witha digital security card and  digital cable TV service  provided by your local cable operator   to view encrypted digital programming  See pages 13 and 53        PC IN     For use whe
161. ked program  to watch     This program exceeds the rating limit you set     Push    mute    to enter PIN        To temporarily unlock the program   1  Press MUTE   2  Enter your four digit PIN code and press ENTER  If the    the program lock mode      Enter PIN code to temporaily un   is released and the Eee eae    normal picture appears  Boa  All locking is disabled  until the TV is turned Cancel Bone    off  and will be enabled    when the TV is turned on again        Locking video inputs       You can use the Input Lock feature to lock the video input  sources  VIDEO 1  VIDEO 2  VIDEO 3  ColorStream HD 1   ColorStream HD 2  HDMI  PC  and channels 3 and 4  You  will not be able to view the input sources or channels until you  turn off the input lock   To lock the video inputs    1  Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon     Press W to display the PIN code entering screen     Enter your four digit PIN code and press ENTER     Press W to highlight Input Lock and press P     A AR B amp W N      Press A or F to select the level of video input locking you  prefer  as described  below     Video  Locks VIDEO 1   VIDEO 2  VIDEO 3   ColorStream HD1   HD2  HDMI and PC  a   Video   Locks VIDEO nes       Herre TRIA  ColorStream HD1 HD2  HDMI  PC  and channels 3 and  4  Select Video  if you use the antenna terminal to play a    Enable Rating Blocking Off  Edit Rating Limits  Channels Block    oO 1  ANT 1    cable box connected and use O 2 OANT2 video tape   the cable box controls 
162. labels  the POP   feature will be disabled  If you then attempt to access the POP  feature  the message    Not available    will appear on screen     5  To save the new input labels  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory default labels  highlight  Reset and press ENTER     Input labeling example     The screen below left shows the default Input Selection screen   with none of the inputs labeled   The screen below right is an  example of how you could label the inputs if you had connected  a DVD player to VIDEO 1  Cable TV to VIDEO 2  an audio  receiver to VIDEO 3  a video recorder to ColorStream HD1   and a DTV set top box to HDMI  Also note that the  ColorStream HD2 input is labeled    Hidden     which means that  the input will be skipped over when INPUT or TV VIDEO is  pressed     Input Selection    Input Selection    Jo anti  O anti     Video 1   DvD     Video 2   Cable      Video 3    Audio Receiver     ColorStream HD1   Video Receiver      ColorStream HD2   ColorSteram HD2  Hidden     HDMI   DTV   QPC Q Pc   O ANT2   ANT2              GD to Select           GID to Select    Input Selection screen  with no inputs labeled    Input Selection screen with  all inputs labeled except input 5   which has been hidden     To clear the input labels   1  Press MENU and open the Preferences menu   2  Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER   3  Highlight Reset and press ENTER     Note  If you set up a device in TheaterNet  its input label will  not be cleared un
163. last mode  memory feature       If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV  the Last  Mode Memory feature automatically turns on the TV when  the power is resupplied     Note  You should unplug the TV s power cord if it is possible  that you will be away from the TV for an extended period of time  after the power Is restored     Press RECALL again   96 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved    01E_089 096_4250HP95 96 05 9 12  10 10 PM  Black       9  Using the Locks menu    The Locks menu includes the Enable Rating Blocking  Edit Rating Limits  Channels Block  Input Lock  Front Panel Lock  Game  Timer  and New PIN Code features  You can use these features after entering the correct PIN code        Entering the PIN code       1  Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon     a    Enable Rating Blocking Off  Edit Rating Limits   Channels Block   Input Lock   Front Panel Lock   Game Timer   New PIN Code    2  Press V  which displays the PIN code entry screen        e The Lock System screen  below  appears if a PIN code has  not been stored  Press the Channel Number buttons to    enter a new four digit code  enter the code a second time to  confirm  and press ENTER     Lock System    Please enter a 4 digit PIN code    Confirm PIN code    Cancel Done    e The Locks Active screen  below  appears if the PIN code is  already stored  Press the Channel Number buttons to enter  your four digit code and press ENTER     Locks Active    Please enter the 4 di
164. layer            we OL  Memory card care and handling eee 92  Setting the On Off Timer wo  ccesesessesessesseseeseseseeneees 93  Setting theisleep timer arei ah a EERE 93  Using the PC setting feature     sssssssssessssssisessressrreessrrressseees 94  Using the Long Life feature   s  sssssssssessssssisesrrsrsrsresssrressseees 94  Pict  re Shifters ran 94  Gray Level      na 95  Reverse        i 99   WAS sca siesta aeayoetvas gh ea a eas heecied R cadets 95  Displaying TV setting information on screen  using REGAL is  cccvsssvsssencentivseveciessteduotscssvesossessdesscociaterss 96  Understanding the auto power off feature    96  Understanding the last mode memory feature          0ecee 96          Chapter 9  Using the Locks MeNU         sssssssesesseeseeeneeenees  Entering the PIN code w  ecscsceessessssessessesessessestssesseaeeneees  If you cannot remember your PIN code  Changing your PIN code wo    e  Blocking TV programs and movies by rating  V Chip            98  Blocking channels inniinn e na 99  Unlocking programs temporarily     sssssssssessssssssserssrsereesseene 99  Locking video inputs ei iinit 99  Using the GameTimer    zianie EE a 100  Using the panel lock feature   s  ssssssssssssssssesssersssreresssrressss 100  Chapter 10  Troubleshooting          1 sssseeesseeeeenserseneenees 101  General troubleshooting oc ceeessesessesseseeseeteseeneeees 101  TV Guide On Screen    FAQS wsescscesessssesseseseeteseseeess 104 106  Chapter 11  Appendix  Specifications wees      
165. lco  Philips    Pilot  Pioneer  Polk Audio  Profitronic  Proscan  Protec  Pulsar  Quarter  Quartz    Quasar    RCA    RadioShack  Radix     01E_046 054_4250HP95  Black    Code  0072  0693  0067  0041  0038  0035  0037  0037  0000  0072  0035  0240  0043  0240  0240  0000  1278  0035  0039  0081   0000  0149  0563   1781  0240  0035  0081  0037  0035  0162  0454  0035  0162  0037  0048  0039  0047   0240  0000  0104   0209  0046  0454   0479  1037  1162  1237  1262  0042  0067  0043  0807  0035  0048  0000  0072  0104  0067  0041   0038  0037  0240  0035  1062  0162  0037   0048  0104  0432   0454  1048  1162   1262  0184  0209  0002  0479  1479  1062  0035  0162   0225  0454  0616   1035  1162  1262  0035  0037  0240  0042  0038  1035  1237  0042  0035  0209  0479  0035  0081  0618   1081  1181  0037  0067  0081  0240  0060  0760  1060  0072  0039  0046  0046  0035  0162  0454   1035  1162  0060  0240  0042  0149  0760  0807  1035  1060  0000  1037  0037    51       VCRs  cont    Brand   Randex   Realistic    ReplayTV  Runco  STS  Samsung  Sanky    Sansui  Sanyo  Scott    Sears    Semp  Sharp  Shintom  Shogun  Singer  Sonic Blue  Sony    Sylvania    Symphonic  TMK   Tatung   Teac   Technics  Teknika  Thomas   Tivo   Toshiba  Totevision  Unitech   Vector   Vector Research  Video Concepts  Videomagic  Videosonic  Villain   Wards    White Westinghouse  XR 1000  Yamaha    Zenith    DVD players  Brand   Aiwa   Apex Digital    Audiologic  B amp K  Blue Parade    Code  0037  0035  0
166. les   gt  two sets of standard A V cables    For better picture performance  if your VCR has S video  use an  S video cable  plus the audio cables  instead of the standard  video cable  However  do not connect both types of video cables  to VIDEO 1  or VIDEO 2  at the same time or the picture  performance will be unacceptable   e Ifyou have a mono VCR  connect L MONO on the TV to your  VCR s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only     C  To view the antenna or Cable signal   Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV      L  To view the VCR   Turn ON the VCR  Select the VIDEO 1 video input source  on the TV         L  To use the TV Guide On Screen    recording features     1  Connect the G LINK    cable according to the  instructions on page 26    2  Make sure the VCR is connected to the A V OUT  terminals on the TV  see illustration     3  Set the VCR to the appropriate line input  refer to your  VCR owner   s manual for details   and then turn OFF the  VCR    4  See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  On Screen    system    5  See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide    On Screen    system              From Cable TV or antenna    Signal splitter IN    Ss     oe  Stereo VCR  m    OUT OUT          TV back panel       FY         Nn  s oeo        VIDEO    aea  ITS     Lt a     cn     Nai    AS        of          0                      Note  The VIDEO AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the  ANT 1  ANT 2  VIDEO 1  VIDEO 2  and VIDEO 3 term
167. less you remove the device from TheaterNet     see page 47    Video 1 DVD  Video 2 Cable  Video 3 Audio Receiver  ColorStream HD 1 Video Receiver  ColorStream HD 2 Hide  HDMI DTV  PC se  ANT 2  Reset Done  70 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_069 080_4250HP95 70  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Tuning channels       Using the Channel Browser       The channel browser stores the most recently viewed channels  up to 32  in the channel history  This feature allows you to    e Keep a separate  temporary  history of the last 32 channels tuned from each of three inputs  ANT 1  ANT 2  and Cable Box    Note  Turning off the TV will clear the channel history for all three inputs    e Quickly surf and tune your recently viewed channels from the channel browser banner  illustrated below      e Surf via Browse mode  to immediately tune channels as you highlight them in the channel browser banner  or Select mode  to surf  over channels in the browser banner before you select one to tune      e Set a    HOME     channel for the ANT 1  ANT 2  and Cable Box inputs   To open the channel browser banner  Press  lt         gt      or ENTER on the remote control       Press  lt 4      to surf back from the most recently viewed channel through the last 32 channels that were tuned from the current  input  which are automatically stored in the channel history for the current input  ANT 1  ANT 2  
168. list  but will not display a reminder until you change the  frequency     66 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_064 068_4250HP95 66  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM       Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       TV Guide On Screen    Services  continued        SETUP screen    After you complete the initial TV Guide On Screen    setup  as    described in Chapter 5   you can change the following settings     e Change system settings  e Change channel display  e Change default options  Highlight a choice  press ENTER  and follow the on screen    instructions        With SETUP highlighted in the Service Bar  press INFO to  display a help screen  Press INFO again to close the screen         Change system settings    This option appears only after you have completed the initial    TV Guide On Screen    setup process  as described in Chapter 5      1  From the SETUP screen  highlight CHANGE SYSTEM  SETTINGS and press ENTER     ae aT egy rent             2  Press ENTER again  to display the  Confirming Your  Settings screen    3  Highlight one of the Ye MAEAEA  options  press I A  ENTER  and follow  the on screen  instructions        Tr E EA OT RRN a Gum Tia          Change channel display  This option allows you to edit channel information that appears  in LISTINGS  including the following   e Reorder the position the channels appear in LISTINGS   e Change the    tune channel    number   Note
169. llation and press ENTER   A new set of    Installation menu icons will appear on screen  as shown in    step 3 below            Installation   Sleep Timer   On Off Timer   PC Settings   HDMI Audio Auto   Slide Show Interval 2 Sec  v AVHD Skip Time 15 min    Ga  Navigate  e  Select Back Exit      Open the Devices menu  highlight IEEE1394 Devices  and    press ENTER     n      1IEEE1394 Devices  TheaterNet Devices        GyNavigate     select GMN Back  I Exit      Highlight the device you want to edit and press ENTER     IEEE1394 Device Management    Brand Type Label Analog Input Used Connected  TOSHIBA AVHD MY DEVICE None No    Reset    Done      Follow the on screen prompts to modify the device    information     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_013 027_4250HP95 25  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276          Important information regarding IEEE1394  device interconnection      Never loop the last device in the chain back to the TV   If the device chain is looped  the TV may not work properly with the  other devices in the chain       Always place devices with the slowest communication  speed at the end of each chain  If a device with a slower  communication speed is placed ahead of a faster device in the  chain  the signal from the slower device will interfere with the signal  from the faster device  To determine the communication speed of  an  EEE1394 device  look for an    S    number near the device   s   EEE1394 connector  The higher t
170. lose the MP3 audio player     Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the regular  TV screen     To close the MP3 audio player and remove the memory card     1  Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the  regular TV screen     2  For a CompactFlash memory card  press the ejector button  and then pull the card straight out from the TV  For all  other memory cards  pull the card straight out from the TV           NOTE  ALWAYS CLOSE THE AUDIO  PLAYER BEFORE REMOVING THE    MEMORY CARD     If you remove the memory card while playing MP3 files  the card  and or saved data may be damaged  THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE  IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY        Memory card care and handling    Use index labels made exclusively for your specific brand of  memory card  Do not use commercially sold labels  which  can cause a malfunction when the card is inserted or  ejected     If the image does not appear correctly  or the audio file does  not play correctly  clean the metallic area of the memory  card using a soft  dry  lint free  anti static cloth  and then  reinsert the card     Prevent contact of the metallic area on the memory card  from coming in contact with dust  dirt  or other foreign  particles  Do not touch the metallic area of the memory  card with your hands or otherwise handle it with anything  other than a soft  dry  lint free  anti static cloth     Note  Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused by the use  of any memory card with this TV  Toshib
171. low steps A and B below     A  Please tune your cable bow to dunne  02    B Make sure to leave your cable box turned ON       Screen 10  The TV Guide On Screen    system will test the code  for the brand of Cable box you selected  Do not press any  keys on the TV  remote control  or Cable box until the  testing process is completed  When testing is completed   screen 11 appears     Case usna piopi please do not press any keys on  any remote control     Now testing code 044  Archer         Screen 11  If your Cable box tuned itself to channel 09 after  testing  select Yes and press ENTER  If you selected ANT 1  in screen 5  screen 13 appears  If you selected Video 1 in  screen 5  screen 12 appears     EPPEN n Vy PEW    The TV Gute On Seren sytem mencis to locate the comert code for your  idle ton brand in omer to work properly     ty your cable box now tuned to channel 09        Ves       We  Test this code again       If your Cable box did not tune itself to channel 09 after  testing and you want to test the same code again  select     Test this code again    and press ENTER     If you want to test a different code  select No and press  ENTER  Screen 10 appears     Note  Many cable boxes require testing more than one code      Continued on next page     40 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_039 042_4250HP95 40  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 07 PM    Chapter 5  TV Guide On Screen    setup       Setting up the TV Guide On Scr
172. lt in speakers   Select On in step 3 above     Selecting the optical audio output  format    Use this feature to select the optical audio output format when  you connect a Dolby Digital decoder or other digital audio  system to the Optical Audio Out terminal on the TV  see     Connecting a digital audio system    on page 21      To select the optical audio output format   1  Press MENU and open the Audio menu   2  Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER        Audio Settings  Advanced Audio Settings  Audio Setup    3  Press W to highlight the Optical Output Format field  and  then press 4 or P to select either Dolby Digital or PCM   depending on your device     MTS Stereo   Language English   Speakers On   Optical Output Format  lt 4 Dolby Digital  gt   Reset Done    4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER     88 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_081 088_4250HP95 88  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 10 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer MP3 audio player       You can use the memory card slots on the TV side panel to view  compatible JPEG files or play compatible MP3 files stored on a  memory card  see    Memory card specifications    below and at  right   You can display JPEG files in thumbnail mode or view  them as a slide show     Note       Never remove the memory card or turn off
173. m     To set the AVHD device skip time     1  Press MENU and open  the Setup menu    2  Highlight AVHD Skip  Time and press P    3  Press A or W to select  the AVHD skip time  1     3  5  or 15 minutes  and  press ENTER     Installation    Sleep Timer  On Off Timer    PC Settings  HDMI Audio Auto  Slide Show Interval 2 Sec    v AVHD Skip Time 15 min           3  Navigate  0  TT CH RTN EOL EXIT A       Setting the HDMI    audio mode       To select the HDMI audio mode     1  Press MENU and open  the Setup menu     2  Highlight HDMI Audio  and press P     3  Press V or A to select  the HDMI audio mode   Auto  Digital  or  Analog  and press  ENTER   Auto is the    Installation Auto  Sleep Timer Digital  On Off Timer Analog  PC Settings    HDMI Audio Auto  gt     Slide Show Interval 2 Sec    v AVHD Skip Time 15 min     a  Navigate      Select Back Exit       recommended mode   See    Connecting an HDMI or a  DVI device to the HDMI input    on page 20     52     01E_046 054_4250HP95 52  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       Note  lf you already set up the TV Guide On Screen    system  the  time and date were set automatically and you can skip this step     To set the time and date   1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   2  Highlight Installation and press ENTER   A new set of    Installation menu icons will appear on screen  as shown in    step 3 below        Open the Time And Date menu  highlight Start Setup  and    press ENTER        Time And Date    Start Setup    If you 
174. m ANTI  C ANT2  Channel Add Delete       Channel Add   Delete Window     Signal Meter       Signal Meter Window              Scan for new channels on desired Antenna        IEEE1394 Devices  gt    IEEE1394 Device Management Window    Devices C    TheaterNet Devices       TheaterNet Setup Window      TV Guide On Screen    Setup     Start  gt    Launch the TV Guide On Screen    to its Installation area    Time and Date  gt  Start Setup  gt   Time And Date Setup Window      System Status     System Information  gt    System Information Window         Navigating the menu system       38    You can use the buttons on the remote  control or TV side panel to access and  navigate your TV   s on screen menu system        Press MENU to open the menu system     e Use the up down left right arrow    buttons  AW P  on the remote  control or TV side panel to move in the  corresponding direction in a menu     Press ENTER to save your menu  settings or select a highlighted item   A  highlighted menu item appears in a  different color in the menu      All menus close automatically if you do  not make a selection within 60 seconds   except the signal meter menu which  closes automatically after 5 minutes     e To close a menu instantly  press EXIT      01E_037 038_4250HP95 38  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       TV side panel Remote control    DTV    2CBLISAT   gt  SVCRIPYR   gt  AVD    S AUDION    S AUDIO2        CHANNEL       VOLUME    ACTION  a MENU  7    A V  lt P    MENU  ENTER    E
175. m an HDMI device or  uncompressed digital video from a DVI     device    This input is designed to accept HDCP     program material in  digital form from EIA CEA 861 861B   compliant   consumer  electronic devices  such as a set top box or DVD player with  HDMI or DVI output     The HDMI input is designed for best performance with 720p  signals but will also accept and display 1080i  480i  and 480p  signals     NOTE  DO NOT CONNECT A PC  USING THE HDMI PORT     ALWAYS use the VGA port provided to connect a PC           To connect an HDMI device  you will need   e one HDMI cable  type A connector  per HDMI  device    For proper operation  it is recommended that you use as  short an HDMI cable as possible    HDMI cable transfers both video and audio  Separate  analog audio cables are not required  see illustration  below   Some CDVs  video CDs  may not output digital  audio signals  In that case  you may hear sound by  connecting analog audio cables     See    Setting the HDMI audio mode    on page 52     HDMI device                                  HDMI  the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or    registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC        01 HDMI   High Definition Multimedia Interface    2  DVI   Digital Video Interface    B  HDCP   High bandwidth Digital Content Protection     4  FIA CEA 861 861B compliance covers the transmission of  uncompressed digital video with high bandwidth digital content  protection  which is being standardize
176. m the FAV SCAN multi window  for at least 7 seconds will be added to the channel history     Clearing channels from the channel history      Turning off the TV will clear all three channel histories   ANT 1  ANT 2  and Cable Box     e Removing the CableCARD    will clear the channel history  for the ANT 1 input    e Reconfiguring the ANT 1  ANT 2  or Cable Box input  will clear the channel history for the newly configured  input s     Note  See page 43 for details on configuring the antenna inputs        Setting a channel as the    Home    channel  for an input    To set a channel as Home using the remote control     1  Tune the TV to the channel you would like to set as the  Home channel for the current antenna input    2  Press and hold the HOME  4  button on the remote  control for 3 seconds  When the Home channel is saved   the channel browser banner will appear at the bottom of  the screen with the home icon flashing green     Note  You can set a different Home channel for each input   ANT 1  ANT 2  and Cable Box inputs only      To set a channel as Home using the menus     1  Press MENU and open the Preferences menu     2  Highlight Home CH Setup and press ENTER  The Home  CH Setup window will display     Home CH Setup    ANT 1  ANT 2  Cable Box    Reset Done    Note   Cable Box  will be active in the Home CH Setup  window only if you connected a cable box to your TV     3  Use the AY buttons to select the input for which you want  to set the Home channel    4  Use the 
177. n  you also can use the AW  buttons on the remote control  or the CHANNEL AW buttons on  the side panel  to change the input      You can repeatedly press INPUT on the remote control or   TV VIDEO on the TV side panel to change the input    To select an  EEE1394 input source  press the TheaterNet DEVICE   button on the remote control  see page 28 and 47     If an IEEE1394 device is the current input  it will appear at the   bottom of the Input Selection list  however  it will not display in the   list if you change the input source     You can label the video input sources according to the specific  devices you have connected to the TV  see    Labeling the video  input sources    on the next page        The source can be    hidden     See page 70 for details           DTV    2CBLISAT    SVCRIPIR    AVD    SAUDION     AUDIO2    Numbers    ic size    ACTION INPUT    Ni  x       w  RS    Fo  PNEU SUBT    Qs z A  BACK         B    r   DVD CLEAR    DVD RTN   W SKIP   1  aw  REW _PAUSE STEP PLAY FF    Sige ics       AMIFM STOP REC    TV  GUIDE    TOSHIBA  CT 90233    Remote control    TV side panel    CHANNEL AV    VOLUME    m  MENU            TV VIDEO       TVWIDEO       Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  69     01E_069 080_4250HP95 69  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Labeling the video input sources       You can label each video input source according to the type of  device you connec
178. n both the main and POP windows simultaneously                  You can view a video source in one window and  Main window              POP window an antenna source in the other    l e The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP  Taz ae Vibous double window is open  If you press FREEZE       when the double window is open  the message     Not available    will appear     Green border   denotes active window     3  Press    to highlight the POP  right  window  will have a green border     a    4  Press INPUT to open the POP Input Selection window  Select the input source  for the POP window by pressing the corresponding Number button  0 8   The    Numbers    current source displays in purple in the POP Input Selection window  sono  6a  INPUT    Th  NFO TTR et   E OPO     AE Te  rece A    POP Input Selection    JO anti    Video 1    Video 2     Video 3    ColorSteram HD1      ColorSteram HD2    HDMI    PC     ANT2        O   GD to Select    ENTER    Ove  P    SLOW  Ski      o Gy     REW PAUSE STEP PLAY    Ie  GIG        SPLIT  To close the POP window and tune to the highlighted window        Press ENTER after highlighting the window you want to view as a normal picture     To close the POP window    NER TL gei H  NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE   Notes about recording  EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY      fthe POP window is open and you try to start recording  the POP window will close and Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma  recording will start  display for extended p
179. n by Tim Hudson   tjh cryptosoft com         THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG    AS IS    AND ANY  EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED  TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT SHALL  THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT   INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR CONSEQUENTIAL  DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  PROCUREMENT OF  SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR PROFITS   OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY  THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR  TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY  WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE  The license and distribution terms for                                                             any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed     i e  this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution  license  including the GNU Public License         1 1 0 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_107 111_4250HP95 110  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 11 PM       Notes        01E_107 111_4250HP95 111  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     05 9 12  10 11 PM       Index                              A EFGHIJ  Antenna Cable seinere a 12 ElA  779 ies wetted e
180. n connecting a personal computer   PC   See page 27     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  1 1     01E_010 012_4250HP95 11  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 05 PM     01E_010 012_4250HP95 12  Black    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Overview of cable types       Note  Two dual wand IR blaster G LINK    cables are included with your TV  All other required  cables  if not provided with your other devices  can be purchased at many electronics accessory  suppliers        Coaxial  F type  cable is used for connecting your antenna  cable TV service  and or  cable converter box to the ANT 1 and or ANT 2 RF inputs on your TV       Standard A V cables  composite video  usually come in sets of three  and are for use  with video devices with standard audio and standard  composite  video output  These  cables  and the related inputs on your TV  are typically color coded according to use   yellow for video  red for stereo right audio  and white for stereo left  or mono  audio       S video cable is for use with video devices with S video output  Separate audio cables  are required for a complete connection    Note  An S video cable provides better picture performance than a composite video cable  If  you connect an S video cable  be sure to disconnect the standard  composite  video cable or  the picture performance will be unacceptable       Component video cables come in sets of three and are for use with video devices with  component video 
181. n the PC  before connecting it to the TV  The following signals can be  displayed    e VGA  640 x 480   60Hz  e SVGA  800 x 600   60Hz  e XGA  1024 x 768   60Hz    Other formats or non standard signals may not be displayed   correctly        To display the optimum picture  use the PC setting feature    see    Using the PC setting feature    on page 94      Signal names for mini D sub 15 pin  connector    Pin assignment for RGB PC    terminal    5 1  Dohsi   15 1                NC  not connected   NC   Ground   Ground   Ground   NC   Ground   NC   NC                   OL OIN   DIN  AJS INJ         pk                         N          iss           A                KSA        TV back panel    i      J ANT 2  amp     Hom    ANT  TheaterNet    outi ouT2 Ve  HDMI IN   Ty ANT 1  090 DA    _    IN  HOMI AUDIO   L    R             n  STREAM J  10 m    LIMONO   p  MONO  mono          O    00                   Computer    Audio cable                   Conversion  adapter   if necessary     Note     Some PC models cannot be connected to this TV       An adapter is not needed for computers with a DOS V compatible mini  D sub 15 pin terminal       Depending on the DVD s title and the specifications of the PC on which  you are playing the DVD Video  some scenes may be skipped or you  may not be able to pause during multi angle scenes     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  27     01E_013 027_4250HP95 27  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 06 PM     
182. ne rer terete ree eee ere rere ere eee  WOW     SRS         xD Picture Card          Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  1 1 3     01E_112 113_4250HP95 113  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 11 PM    TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS  L L C     HEAD OFFICE  82 TOTOWA ROAD  WAYNE  NJ 07470  U S A   NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION 1420 B TOSHIBA DRIVE  LEBANON  TN 37087  U S A     TOSHIBA OF CANADA LTD     HEAD OFFICE  191 McNABB STREET  MARKHAM  ONTARIO  L3R 8H2  CANADA   TEL   905  470 5400  SERVICE CENTERS   TORONTO  191 McNABB STREET  MARKHAM  ONTARIO L3R 8H2  CANADA   TEL   905  470  5400  MONTREAL  18050 TRANS CANADA  KIRKLAND  QUEBEC  H9J 4A1  CANADA   TEL   514  390 7766  VANCOUVER  22171 FRASERWOOD WAY  RICHMOND  B C   VeW 1J5  CANADA   TEL   604  303 2500    MANUFACTURED BY  TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS  L L C     CableClear  ColorStream  StableSound  and TheaterWide are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products  L L C   Channel Browser  GameTimer  SurfLock  Symbio  and TheaterNet are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products  L L C     PRINTED IN USA I O S Ki i BA     05 09  Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_114_4250HP95 114 05 9 12  9 03 PM  Black    
183. nel controls and connections     10  TV back panel connections      7 wekl  Overview of cable types         ssee i512  About the connection illustrations        cccseeeseceseeteeeeeeeeees 13  Connecting a digital CableCARD    oo  eeeseeesesseseeneees 13  Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV    AO Sable  DOR enes a stata yetsaat oats Gas etic des 14  Connecting a camcorder    wi 14  Connecting a VCR and Cable box             wend  Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver      ce cscs 16  Connecting a DVD player with S video  a VCR    anda    Cable boxe icstedespvatuietoreecsiortenstaasvnessvorsd tovuetereesos 17  Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream      component video  and a VCR    eseseesssesseeesesseseeseeneaes 18  Connecting two VERS Annen o a a a aR A 19  Connecting an HDMI    or a DVI device to the   HDMI Inputs  riei rieri E AE 20  Connecting a digital audio system   sssssssssssssssssssssessssriessreeee 21  Connecting an analog audio system       csessessesesesseseeseees 21  Controlling infrared remote controlled devices   through the TV  IR pass through         ees 22  Connecting IEEE1394 video devices        cssseceseees gis 23   Using analog compatible IEEE1394 devices                 23  Supported signals      cceessesesesseseeeseeeeeneeees weds       Using TheaterNet    on screen device control                23  Connecting an AVHD  external hard drive  or D VH    digital teCOLdEE aiiin aa iaiia 24   TEEE1394 device initialization         ccssseceseeseeeeet
184. nformation in the panel menu fields     e BOX SIZE  The initial Info Box size when you open the  TV Guide On Screen    system  Choices are No  Small   Large  and Last Used  default      BOX CYCLE  The Info Box size rotation when you press  INFO on the remote control when the TV Guide   On Screen    system is open  Choices are No Only  Small  Only  Large Only  No  amp  Small  No  amp  Large  Small  amp   Large  and All  default      AUTO GUIDE  Automatic entry into the TV Guide  On Screen    system when the TV is powered on  Choices  are On  default  and Off    Note  Set the AUTO GUIDE to Off if you do not want the   TV Guide On Screen    system to open every time you turn   on the TV     4  When finished  press ENTER to highlight DONE  and  press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the  changes  or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with no  changes         Record defaults    1  From the SETUP screen  highlight CHANGE DEFAULT  OPTIONS and press ENTER     2  Highlight RECORD DEFAULTS and press MENU to  display the Record Defaults panel menu        3  Enter the required information in the panel menu fields   start time  end time  recorder choice  how long to keep a  Record event  the quality of the recording   See    Record  features    on page 63 for details on entering values in these    fields     4  When finished  press ENTER to highlight DONE  and  press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the  changes  or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with  no changes      
185. ng area  Lowering the darkness of the sidebars will  help reduce screen burn in     To set the gray level of the sidebars   1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu     Highlight Long Life and press P     2   3  Press A or W to highlight the Gray Level  and then press P   4      Press A or W to select your desired level of darkness    1 Black  2 Dark Gray or 3 Gray            Sleep Timer Picture Shift On     On Off Timer 1  PC Settings Reverse 2  HDMI Audio Auto White  Slide Show Interval 2 Sec  AVHD Skip Time 15 min    Long Life  gt      Eh Navigate  S  Select H Back EI Exit    Note       The gray level feature does not affect video being viewed in  16 9 aspect ratio          When receiving a signal that has sidebars  e g   4 3 aspect  ratio video over a 1080i or 720p signal   the gray level feature  will not be applied to the sidebars     Reverse    The picture is displayed alternately between positive image and  negative image to reduce the risk of phosphor burn in of the  screen     This function is effective for a still pattern image   To activate the reverse    1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu    2  Highlight Long Life and press P     3  Press A or W to highlight the Reverse  and then press  ENTER     4 Sleep Timer Picture Shift On  On Off Timer Gray Level 1  PC Settings Reverse    HDMI Audio Auto White  Slide Show Interval 2 Sec  AVHD Skip Time 15 min    Long Life  gt      Gpnavigate     Select EL  Back EI Exit    The positive image and negative image will alternate 
186. ng features   1  Connect the G LINK    cable according to the  instructions on page 26   2  Make sure the VCR is connected to the A V OUT  terminals on the TV  see illustration      3  Set the VCR to the appropriate line input  refer to your  VCR owner   s manual for details   and then turn OFF the  VCR     4  See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  On Screen    system    5  See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  On Screen    system              1 8 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_013 027_4250HP95 18  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 05 PM    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting two VCRs       You will need    gt  one signal splitter   gt  three coaxial cables     gt  two sets of standard A V cables  e For better picture performance  if VCR 1  an S video cable  plus the audio cables     has S video  use  instead of the    standard video cable  However  do not connect both types  of video cables to VIDEO 1  or VIDEO 2  at the same time  or the picture performance will be unacceptable        f VCR 1 has mono audio  connect L MONO on the TV  VIDEO 1   to the audio out terminal on VCR 1 using the white audio cable    only       Do not connect the same VCR to the output and input terminals on    the TV at the same time     C  To view the antenna or Cable signal   Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV      O To view VCR 1     Turn ON VCR 1  Select the VIDEO  on the TV       J To dub or e
187. nguage in  your area     Note  Ifthe  program or video    you selected is not closed captioned  no captions will display  on screen     e To view text     Highlight T1  T2    T3  or T4   Note  lf text is not  available in your a  area  a black F c Weather  rectangle may Cloudy  appear on your POR Ran       screen  If this  happens  turn the Closed Caption Mode Off    e To turn off the Closed Caption mode   Select Off in step 3 above     Note  A closed caption signal may not display in the following situations     When a videotape has been dubbed     When the signal reception is weak     When the signal reception is non standard             Advanced closed captions    You can customize the closed caption display characteristics by  changing the text size  type  edge  color  and the background  color  You cannot set the Caption Text and Background as the  same color     Note  This feature is available for digital channels only     To customize the closed captions   1  Press MENU and open    the Preferences menu     eer  2  Highlight Closed Favorite Channels    Closed Caption Mode CC1  Cap tion Advanced and Closed Caption Advanced  press ENTER  Input Labeling  Menu Language English  Hi CHS  3  Press A or W to    a  highlight the     i Navigate     select GL Back EI Exit    characteristic you want  to change  and then  press or P to select the format for that characteristic     4  To save the Advanced Closed Captions    new settings  Caption Size  lt  Auto  gt   highlight Caption
188. nic    CCE  Calix  Canon  Carver  Cineral  Citizen  Colt  Craig    Curtis Mathes    Cybernex  Daewoo  Denon  Dynatech  Electrohome  Electrophonic  Emerex  Emerson    Fisher  Fuji  Funai    GE    Garrard   Go Video  GoldStar  Gradiente   HI Q   Harley Davidson  Harman Kardon  Harwood  Headquarter  Hitachi   Hughes Network Systems  Jvc   Jensen    KEC    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     05 9 12  10 08 PM    Code  0749  0790  1052   1053  1054  1285   1286  1287  1289   1749  0724  0722  0856  1856    Code  0048  0209  0000  0278  0037  0000  0041  0278  0035  0240  0037  0278  0240  0104  0184  0121  0209   0002  0479  1479  0072  0278  0037  0035  0081  0278  0037  0278  1278  0072  0037  0047  0240   0072  0060  0035  0162   0041  0760  1035  0240  0045  0278  1278  0042  0000  0037  0037  0032  0037  0184  0000   0121  0043  0209   0002  0278  0479   1278  1479  0047  0104  0035  0033  0000  0060  0035  0240   0760  0807  1035   1060  0000  0432  0037  0038  1237  0000  0047  0000  0081  0038  0072  0046  0000  0042  0041  0042  0067  0041  0041  0037  0278          Chapter 6  Setting up your TV    TheaterNet  IR device codes  continued     VCRs  cont    Brand   KLH   Keen   Kenwood   Kodak   LXI   Lloyd   s   Logik   MEI   MGA   MGN Technology  MTC  Magnasonic  Magnavox    Magnin  Marantz  Marta  Matsushita  Memorex    Minolta  Mitsubishi  Motorola  Multitech  NEC    Nikko  Noblex  Olympus  Optimus    Orion    Panasonic    Penney    Pentax  Phi
189. nt ghost images   This type of damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR  WARRANTY   Never leave the Plasma TV on for extended periods of time  while it is displaying the following images or formats     e Fixed  non moving  images  including but not limited  to PIP POP windows  closed captions  video game  patterns  TV station logos  stock tickers  and websites        e Special formats that do not use  the entire screen  including but not  limited to widescreen or letterbox  format media viewed on a 4 3 H  aspect ratio display  with gray or i  black bars at the top and bottom of the screen  and 4 3  aspect ratio format media viewed on a widescreen 16 9  aspect ratio display  with gray or black bars on the left  and right sides of the screen                     Service    34  WARNING  RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK   AAN Newer attempt to service the TV yourself  Opening  and removing the covers  except as specified  herein  may expose you to dangerous voltage or other  hazards  Refer all servicing to a Toshiba Authorized Service  Center        35  If you have the TV serviced     e Ask the service technician to use only replacement parts  specified by the manufacturer     e Upon completion of service  ask the service technician to  perform routine safety checks to determine that the TV is  in safe operating condition        36  When the TV reaches the end of its useful life  ask a  qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV        05 9 12  10 05 PM       FCC Declaration of Conformi
190. ntrast for darkened room  factory setting   Preference Your personal preferences             To select the picture mode  EN VA    Press PIC MODE on the remote control  OD  The following popup menu appears on  A  screen      Has ct  Mode 4 Stanaara  gt   Goi 51s   Repeatedly press PIC MODE to cycle 09 Q  among the modes  PIC f FGH   HOME SA       MODE Te O sda rok  To select the picture mode using the menu system   1  Press MENU and open the Video menu   2  Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER        E    Picture Settings  Advanced Picture Settings  Theater Settings    Mode  lt  Sports  gt    Contrast 100      Brightness 50                  j   Color 50       i   Tint 0          j   Sharpness 50        j  Reset Done    3  Press W to highlight the Mode field  and then  lt P to select  the mode you prefer     Picture Settings Mode  Standard  Mode  lt  Standard  gt     4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER     Note       The picture mode you selected is for the current input  selection only  ANT 1 in the example above   You can select  a different picture mode for each input selection       Ifyou select one of the factory set picture modes  Sports   Standard  or Movie  and then change a picture quality setting   for example  increase the contrast or change the color  temperature   the picture mode automatically changes to  Preference in the Picture Settings menu        Adjusting the 
191. nu   2  Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER     Audio Settings  Advanced Audio Settings  Audio Setup       3  Press W to highlight StableSound  and then press  lt 4 or    to    select On   Bass BO r  Treble 50    pa  Balance pe  StableSound  lt  Off  gt     Reset Done    4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To reset the settings to the factory defaults   highlight Reset and press ENTER     Note  The RESET function returns your audio adjustments to  the following factory settings     Bass    ceceseeee center  50   Treble            center  50   Balance          center  0     StableSound    Off    To turn off the StableSound feature   Select Off in step 3 above     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  87     01E_081 088_4250HP95 87    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 10 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Adjusting the audio  continued        Using the SRS WOW    surround sound  feature    WOW    is a special combination of SRS Labs audio  technologies  SRS 3D  FOCUS  and TruBass  that creates a  thrilling surround sound experience with deep  rich bass from  stereo sound sources  Your TV   s audio will sound fuller  richer   and wider    To adjust the WOW    settings     1  Put the TV in STEREO mode  see    Selecting stereo SAP  broadcasts    on page 86      2  Press MENU and open the Audio menu   3  Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER        Audio Settings  Advanced Audio Settings
192. nu  changes no  finished entering all characters  highlight DONE and press information  and returns to the Service Bar   ENTER      EDIT SEARCH  Displays the keyboard  from which you    can ie the as     eS  eywrond                   DELETE SEARCH  Displays the Confirmation panel  menu  Select YES to delete the search or NO to close the  panel menu        CANCEL  Closes the panel menu  changes no  information  and returns to the highlighted keyword        Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  6 1     01E_059 064_4250HP95 61 05 9 12  10 08 PM    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       TV Guide On Screen    Services  continued        RECORDINGS screen    The RECORDINGS service screen displays a list of previously  recorded or currently recording shows on an IEEE1394  recording device connected to the TV  see Chapter 2    Note  RECORDINGS will not appear in the Service Bar unless you  have an IEEE1394 video recording device connected to one of the   EEE1394 ports on the TV  See Chapter 2 for details   For additional details  see    Record features    on page 63   e With RECORDINGS highlighted in the Service Bar  press  INFO to display a help screen  Press INFO again to close the    screen        To choose the way recordings are displayed     1  Highlight RECORDINGS on the Service Bar  and press  MENU to display the Recording Options panel menu     2  Press AV to choose between View As
193. numeric and dash       buttons on the remote  control to enter the desired Home channel for each input    5  To save your entries  highlight Done and press ENTER   To clear your entries  highlight Reset and press ENTER     To tune to the Home channel     While an input that has a set  Home channel is active  press the    HOME      button on the    remote control     Note  lf you press the HOME  button while an input other than  an antenna or Cable Box input is  selected  the TV will tune to the  most recently tuned Home  channel and input     NEXT    P NEXT    eNO  Tv  GUIDE    TOSHIBA       72 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_069 080_4250HP95 72  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Tuning channels  continued        Tuning your favorite channels    To tune to the channels you programmed as Favorite Channels   see page 46     Tuning to the next programmed channel    To tune to the next programmed channel   Press CHANNEL AY on the remote control or TV side panel   Note       This feature will not work unless you program channels into the  TV s channel memory  see page 44       Ifyou are recording a digital channel  you will only be able to  change analog channels while the recording is in progress  If you  are recording an analog channel  you will only be able to change  digital channels while the recording is in progress  This is  because the TV tuner that is being recorded  d
194. ny satellite service           1 6 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_01  027_4250HP95 16  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 05 PM    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting a DVD player with S video  a VCR  and a Cable box       You will need                   one signal splitter  five coaxial cables  two sets of standard A V cables    Note  If you have a mono VCR  connect L MONO on the TV   VIDEO 1  to your VCR s audio out terminal using the white audio  cable only     one S video cable    one pair of standard audio cables   Note       fyour DVD player does not have S video  use a standard video  cable instead  Do not connect an S video cable and a standard  video cable to VIDEO 1  or VIDEO 2  at the same time or the  picture performance will be unacceptable     fyour DVD player has component video  see page 18   Do not connect the DVD player and VCR to the same set of  A V inputs on the TV   See the illustration  which shows the    VCR connected to VIDEO 1 on the TV  and the DVD player  connected to VIDEO 2      To view basic channels and access the TV   s features     Select the ANT 1 video input source   Use the TV controls  to change channels and access the TV   s features     To view premium Cable channels    Turn OFF the VCR  Select the ANT 2 video input source  on the TV   Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4  whichever  channel the Cable box output is set to   Use the Cable box  controls to change channels     Note  
195. oft com     OpenSSL 0 9 7d Copyright    1998 2000 the OpenSSL Project  All Rights   reserved  Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without   modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions are met    1  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice    this list of conditions and the following disclaimer    2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice    this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation   and or other materials provided with the distribution   advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must  isplay the following acknowledgement  This product includes software  eveloped by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit  http   openssl org    he names    OpenSSL Toolkit    and    Open SSL Project    must not be used  to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior  written permission  For written permission  please contact openssl   core openssl org    5  Products derived from this software may not be called    OpenSSL    nor may     Open SSL    appear in their names without prior written permission of the  OpenSSL Project      Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following  acknowledgement     This product includes software developed by the  OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit  http   www openssl org                           w   gt                                 
196. ohm   PR  0 7 V p p   75 ohm   PB  0 7 V p p   75 ohm   AUDIO  150 mV rms   22 k ohm or greater    Suggested formats  1080i  480p  480i  720p Supplied R hisses    e Remote control with two size    AA    alkaline batteries    Weight  42HP95  117 3 lbs  53 0 kg   50HP95  142 6 lbs  64 7 kg     e Power cord  three wire grounding type   e Noise filter   ZCAT2436 1330A M  see page 14   ZCAT3035 1330  see page 14        a l o Ze       E EDID   Enhanced Extended Display Identification ae  see o F as L    wher s anual  this Doo  Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  1 07   01E_107 111_4250HP95 107 05 9 12  10 11 PM    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Chapter 11  Appendix       Limited United States Warranty    for Plasma Televisions       Toshiba America Consumer Products  L L C      TACP     makes the following  limited warranties to original consumers in the United States  THESE  LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER  PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS PLASMA  TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER  PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE     PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN THE U S A  AND USED  ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U S A   INCLUDING  WITHOUT  LIMITATION  CANADA AND MEXICO  ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE  WARRANTIES     PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE  U S A   INCLUDING  WITHOUT LIMITATION  CANADA AND MEXICO   AND USED IN THE U S A   ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE  WARRANTIES     Limited One  1  Year Warrant
197. onal Service Division at 1 800 631 3811     Q  If I make a mistake during setup  how do I go back to  the previous step     A  Complete the remaining setup steps  When    Confirming  Your Settings    appears  select    No  repeat setup process      Follow the on screen prompts and input the correct  information     Q  What if the channel number is not visible on my cable  box    A  Your cable box may be defaulting to a clock or time display  once the channel changes  Watch the box carefully when  testing the cable box brand code to see if the channel  changes to 09     Q  Why won t my VCR turn on   A  There are several possibilities     a  An incorrect or    no VCR    code was entered during the  TV Guide On Screen    initial setup  Press GUIDE on the  remote control  and then press    to highlight SETUP  Press     to highlight    Change system settings     and then press  ENTER  Follow the on screen prompts to select the correct  VCR information    b  Make sure the G LINK     IR blaster  cable is connected  correctly  see page 26     c  The VCR record timer is on  Turn off the timer     d  The wired remote VCR is incompatible     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     05 9 12  10 11 PM    Chapter 10  Troubleshooting       TV Guide On Screen    FAQs  continued        CHANNEL LINEUPS  amp  LISTINGS  14  Q  Why aren t all my channels initially displayed    A  After initial setup  approximately 120 channels are  automatically displayed  The user may use t
198. one jack is being used  the sound from all  speakers will be muted  and normal sound will be output to the        eae headphones only   buttons function as up down left right menu navigation  buttons   10 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_010 012_4250HP95 10  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 05 PM    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       TV back panel connections       For an explanation of cable types  see page 12     Before connecting the external     device to the TV  remove the  applicable panel cover by squeezing  the tabs in the direction of the  arrow       and pulling the cover             TV back                                                 Wall outlet  120V AC 60Hz    aD  Power cord        VIDEO 1 IN and VIDEO 2 IN     Two sets of standard   composite  video and standard audio inputs plus optional  S video inputs for connecting devices with composite video  or S video output   Note  Standard  composite  video and S video cables carry  only video information  separate audio cables are required for a  complete connection        ColorStream   HD 1 and ColorStream   HD 2     Two sets  of ColorStream   high definition component video and  standard stereo audio inputs for connecting devices with  component video output  such as a Toshiba DVD player  with ColorStream    See pages 16 and 18    Note  Component video cables carry only video information   separate audio cables are required for a complete connection       A V
199. oof of  purchase     2  All warranty servicing of this Plasma Television must be performed by an  Authorized TCL Service Depot     3  The warranties from TCL are effective only if this Plasma Television is  purchased in Canada from an authorized TCL dealer and operated in  Canada         4  Labor service charges for set installation  setup  adjustment of customer  controls  and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered  by this warranty  Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna  systems  misaligned satellite dishes  cable television distribution  VCRs   DVD players recorders  personal computer level IEEE 1394 devices   and any other connected signal source device are your responsibility     5  Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited  above  and do not extend to any Plasma Television or parts that have  been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the Plasma Television or  parts caused by fires  misuse  accident  Acts of God  such as lightning  or fluctuations in electric power   improper installation  improper  maintenance  or use in violation of instructions furnished by TCL  use or  malfunction through simultaneous use of this Plasma Television and  connected equipment  or to units that have been modified or had the  serial number removed  altered  defaced  or rendered illegible        o  h  G       o                                                       How to Obtain Warranty Service    If  after following all of the
200. or Cable Box only        Press  gt      to surf forward from the previous channels in the channel history up to the most recently viewed channel              Elements of the channel browser banner                                 Active channel Highlighted channel Channels stored Active channel Home channel instructions  status  Displays with a yellow in the channel  In Browse mode  because the highlighted        Press  lt q  SN  or D gt   gen   i inthi i history j j j         Displays in this area     background in Select mode  channel is tuned automatically  the active to surf the te  channels  only if available   Displays with a yellow channel and the highlighted channel in the channel history   outline in Browse mode   will always be the same                                        12 3 14 26 1 17 2 3 Hold HOME key p  12345678 ABCD DTV QRS TUV XYZ 3 sec to program  Dy   SelectMode    ANT1 CABLE3 480p Q 17 2000    t a Tes a                                                       Current mode Current Current Active Channel call Resolution Home channel   Select or Browse  input antenna type     channel letters   cable or TV  number  if available                                To toggle between Browse mode and Select mode     After opening the channel browser banner  press A or W to toggle between Browse mode and Select mode  The    Current mode    field  on the channel browser banner will flash green  Note  The channel browser banner opens in Browse mode by default       To tune
201. orite channels 2  Highlight Favorite Channels E  only  skipping other channels you do not normally watch  and press ENTER  Ds  To add and delete channels in the Favorite Channels sets  3  Highlight Edit and press D   o      eset  1  Press MENU and open the Preferences menu  ENTER  EE EME cae  A   vO 23 3    Done  2  Highlight Favorite Channels and press ENTER  4  Highlight Reset and press  3  Use the AW buttons to select either ANT 1  ANT 2  or ENTER   Cable box and press ENTER  5  Highlight Done and press ENTER   4  Highlight Edit and press ENTER  To tune your favorite channels for the current ANT input   2 C CS Be Press FAV CH AV   SVS Cle my   ey   em a To tune your favorite channels using the favorite channel  oe Capion Avanos O cable Box list   Menu Language English Empty Empty Empty  ome GH Setup a ee Ree   1  Press 100 to display the favorite channel list       Gnovigse  8  soeet GH Back EIN Ect zs 2  Press the corresponding number button  gt    1 9  to select your desired channel  4         5  To add a channel to the selected Favorite Channel set  Note  To tune your favorite channels for another W  Use the AY buttons to highlight an unchecked box next to a input you will need to change the Input Selection W  channel you want to set as a favorite  and then press ENTER to first 8  check the box     To delete the channel from the selected Favorite Channels set  To quickly scan through your favorite channels in a nine  Highlight a checked box and press picture multi windo
202. ormation  Press INFO again to close the  box     Help is also available in a panel menu  Press INFO to  display an expanded Info Box  Press INFO again to close  the box     RECORD REMIND    33  Q  Can I tune to a different channel while recording a  program     A  No     34  Q  How many programs can be scheduled for RECORD in  the GUIDE     A  There is no limit to the number of shows that can be  programmed into the schedule memory     35  Q  Ifa program is scheduled to RECORD on a Regular    basis  does it count as five     A  No  whether a program is scheduled ONCE   REGULARLY  or WEEKLY  it only counts as one show in  the RECORD stack memory     36  Q  If I have a power failure  will I need to reset the  recorded shows I have already programmed     A  The start times and channel numbers of shows that have  been programmed will be retained in the memory of the  TV Guide On Screen    system  Titles will appear once  listings are restored     37  Q  Can I set a Record or Remind event without  highlighting a show title in the TV Guide On Screen     system     A  Yes  TV Guide On Screen    has a Manual Record and  Remind feature  Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar   and press MENU  Choose the event type  press ENTER   and then enter the date  start and stop time  channel  number  and so forth     38  Q  What do the frequencies for Record and Remind mean   A  Once   records reminds one time    Daily  manual only    records reminds the show the time   channel  input  recorder 
203. output   ColorStream   is Toshiba   s brand of component video    These cables are typically color coded red  green  and blue  Separate audio cables are  required for a complete connection    Note  Component video cables provide better picture performance than a standard  composite   video or S video cable      HDMI cable is for use with devices with HDMI  High Definition Multimedia  Interface  output  HDMI cable delivers digital audio and video in its native format   This cable carries both video and audio information  therefore  separate audio cables are  not required for a complete HDMI device connection  See page 20 for further details    Note  HDMI cable provides better picture performance than a standard  composite  video or  S video cable      JEEE1394 cable is for use with video devices with compressed digital video output  that meet CEA specifications for IEEE1394  This cable carries both video and audio  information  therefore  no separate audio cables are required for a complete connection   See pages 23 25    Note      The transmission capability of any IEEE1394 cable used with this TV must be S400   400 Mbps maximum        EEE1394 cable provides better picture performance than a standard  composite   video or S video cable        Dual wand IR blaster G LINK    cable is for use with video devices with IR  infrared   remote control  Two of these cables are included with your TV  One is for connection  to the G LINK    terminal  page 26  to enable TV Guide On Screen
204. pactFlash   memory card  Type1     Note  The picture viewer and audio player support FAT16 formatted  cards only  Other memory cord formats  including but not limited to  FAT32 or NTFS  are not supported      lt  SS   is a trademark       MMC and MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG  and licensed to MMCA  MultiMediaCard Association      e Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation   e xD Picture Card is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co   Ltd       Toshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash   and CF logo    registered trademarks        E Maximum memory card capacity  512 MB     E Maximum displayable JPEG image size  8 MB     JPEG files larger than 8 MB will not display   E Maximum displayable JPEG image resolution  6000x4000  pixels     MP3 files have no size limit other than the maximum capacity  of the memory card   E Maximum number of files per directory  370     All files over the 370th in a single directory will not display play     Files in directories more than 10 levels down from the top level  directory will not display play   E Maximum number of files per memory card  JPEG   1 000   MP3   200       All JPEG files over the 1 000th on a single memory card will not  display       All MP3 files over the 200th on a single memory card will not play     E File name restrictions       File names cannot contain the following characters           lt  gt         File names must contain US ASCII characters only     The maximum file name leng
205. peat step 3 to enter the rest of the characters   5  Highlight Done and press ENTER to save the information     IEEE1394 Device Label Edit  MY DEVICE_    B D    kx 0 CO  a  lt x lt   Dx    on  lt  OT  gt   os v     E  L  S  Z  6  Cl    Cancel Done    Note       The TV may not recognize incompatible or non A V  EEE1394  devices  however  these devices may still be available to other  compatible IEEE1394 devices on the network       You may be able to use the TV s remote control to operate some  compatible IEEE1394 devices  You must first program the  remote control to recognize the device  see Chapter 3   If you  have an IEEE1394 Cable box or satellite receiver  you may need  to use the remote control that came with the device     e Toshiba is not liable for the operation of any IEEE1394 device  other than the Toshiba Symbio AVHD recorder     24 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_013 027_4250HP95 24    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 06 PM    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting IEEE1394 video devices  continued           IEEE1394 device management    The IEEE1394 device information is saved in the TV   s memory   You can edit this device information  for example  edit the  device name  change the analog input information  or delete the  device information from the TV   s memory if you no longer use  that device      To edit the IEEE1394 device information   1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu   2  Highlight Insta
206. picture quality    You can adjust the picture quality  contrast  brightness  color   tint  and sharpness  to your personal preferences           Selection  lt  Pressing  gt   Contrast lower higher  Brightness darker lighter  Color paler deeper  Tint reddish greenish  Sharpness softer sharper          To adjust the picture quality   1  Press MENU and open the Video menu   2  Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER        Picture Settings  Advanced Picture Settings  Theater Settings    Mode Sports   Contrast 100                    Brightness i 1       Color     Tint i   Sharpness 50           I  Reset Done    3  Press A or F to select the picture quality you want to adjust   Contrast  Brightness  Color  Tint  or Sharpness   and then  and P to adjust the setting  as described in the table    above   Picture Settings Mode  Preference  Sharpness 70                 4  To save the new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to the factory defaults  highlight Reset  and press ENTER     The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically saved in the  Preference mode  see    Selecting the picture mode     above left      Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  8 1     01E_081 088_4250HP95 81  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 09 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Adjusting the picture  continued        Using CableClear    DNR  digital noise  reduction     The CableClear   digital noise reduction feature allows you to 
207. processing  within the TV  video processing in an attached gaming system  and video processing different  compression rates used by broadcasters in their programming  You may want to try one or more of the  following suggestions  which may help to reduce the effect of this phenomenon          If the TV is connected to an A V receiver that has a programmable audio delay feature  use this feature  to help synchronize the sound to the picture       If you notice this phenomenon only on certain TV channels  please contact your local broadcast   cable  or satellite provider to inform them of this issue           Memory card  problems    e Make sure you are using a supported or valid memory card format  page 89    e Make sure you have saved the picture files in the correct file format  page 89    e The card may be inserted improperly  Remove the card and reinsert it  page 90    e The memory card may be empty   e The memory card may be damaged            01E_101 106_4250HP95 101  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  1 0 1    05 9 12  10 11 PM    Chapter 10  Troubleshooting       General troubleshooting  continued        Symptom    Solution          Now Booting    message  appears on screen    e When you turn on the TV after connecting the power cord  the message     Now Booting       will be displayed on screen until the TV enters standby mode  This is normal and is not a    sign of malfunction        Sound problems    e 
208. program for the first time  it is recommended that you perform a test recording to  make sure your system is set up properly      Ifthe power is cut or the plug becomes disconnected during timer recording  any recorded contents will be lost  It may take up to a week  before an entire program schedule is available      Ifthe TV power cord is unplugged for an extended period of time  it may take up to 24 hours with the TV in standby mode  power cord  plugged in and power OFF  to download the entire TV Guide On Screen    program schedule  It may take up to a week before an entire  program schedule is available  Be sure to follow the instructions under    TV Guide On Screen    Reminder    on page 42     LISTINGS screen    e When you open the TV Guide On Screen    system   LISTINGS is always the first service displayed     ml ere ey we    e Use the Number buttons on the remote control to jump to a  specific channel   s listings    e To watch a show  if on now   highlight the show and press  ENTER     e To display the Episode Options panel menu for a particular  show  highlight a show and press MENU        TTT RYH    Ver Steere  Da rrr             PS Fer    LS I    e With LISTINGS highlighted in the Service Bar  press INFO TE TT   to display a help screen  Press INFO again to close the screen  oe oy er oe Lanta       Episode Options panel menu    From the Episode Options panel menu  you can choose to set a  recording  set a reminder  or tune to the channel  The following  are descr
209. put value     To remove a device from TheaterNet   1  Follow steps 1 5 above   2  Highlight Reset and press ENTER     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  47     01E_046 054_4250HP95 47  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 07 PM    Chapter 6  Setting up your TV       Setting up and using TheaterNet    on screen device control  continued        Using the TheaterNet control icons    1  Set up your infrared devices in TheaterNet  if you have not  already done so  see page 47      Note   EEE1394 devices do not need to be set up in  TheaterNet because they appear automatically in the  TheaterNet menu     2  Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the device  control selection screen     vv    2 CBLISAT    SVCRIPYR    AVD    S AUDIOL    GAUDIO     ACTION    DEVICE  CTRL  A       3  Using the AVP buttons  highlight the device you want  to control and press ENTER     TheaterNet  A    Video 2   Video 3  H Toshiba    Toshiba    ColorStream HD1    ColorStream HD2    2 Toshiba Ka Toshiba  Y    4  The input automatically changes to the input for the  selected device  and the device   s control icons display  on screen    ColorStream HD1    Ma noo mo o lo ENTER  gt        TOP MENU  SELECT EXIT v       Highlight the icon for the function you want to control and  press ENTER     To select the device   s control icons directly   Press CTRL     To close the on screen control icons   Press EXIT   To view another source     Press DEVICE and select the 
210. r DVD player has HDMI video  see page 20     LJ To view antenna or Cable channels   Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV      LJ To view the DVD player     Turn ON the DVD player  Select the ColorStream HD 1  video input source on the TV      O To view the VCR     Turn ON the VCR  Select the VIDEO 1 video input  source on the TV      L  To record a TV program while watching a DVD     Turn ON the VCR  Tune the VCR to the channel to  record  Select the ColorStream HD 1 video input source  on the TV  to view the DVD       To select the video input source  press INPUT on the remote control   see page 69   To program the TV remote control to operate other  devices  see Chapter 3        The unauthorized recording  use  distribution  or revision of television  programs  videotapes  DVDs  and other materials is prohibited under the  Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries  and may subject  you to civil and criminal liability              From antenna or Cable    Signal splitter IN  OUT OUT           Stereo VCR BAA  ial 3       IN from ANT 35 S  VY Z  CH3    a OS CG  4  OUT to TV    t          cxi Z I     TV back pal       TheaterNet  OUTI   ouT2  VIDEO  VIDEO          JOUT        CHIDAN O  Seq    gt  ELD G             DVD player with component video    Note  The VIDEO AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1   ANT 2  VIDEO 1  VIDEO 2  and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate  input mode is selected        L  To use the TV Guide On Screen    recordi
211. r additional control options for eee   2 e  use the TV s remote control to operate your home theater system  set up  the TV  the TheaterNet on screen device    For additional control options  see    TheaterNet on screen device control feature  You can use this        Jaumea a  control    at right feature to control many IR oS eeeeee    O my yom 4    remote controlled devices and  TEEE1394 devices using the on          If you cannot locate the device   s infrared sensor           1  Turn OFF the device  screen control icons   2  Starting at the lower left corner of the device  place the end of the See pages 47 51 for details on setting  device   s remote control  with the infrared emitter  so it touches the up and using TheaterNet     front of the device and press POWER   Do not use the TV s remote  control for this step     3  If the device turns on  the point at which the remote control touched  the device is the location of the sensor     4  If the device does not turn on  move the remote control slightly to the Note  The TheaterNet on screen icons are the only device functions  right and press POWER again  available when the icons are on screen  To access other device  functions  close the TheaterNet icon window     See pages 23 25 for details on  connecting IEEE 1394 devices                    5  Repeat step 4 until you locate the device   s infrared sensor        22 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_01  027_4250HP95 22 05 9 12  10 06 PM 
212. r reception caused some of the data to be missed    e  The cable box was turned OFF  The TV power cord must  be plugged in and the cable box must be ON    g  A V Cable  The VCR was turned OFE If the connection  includes stereo cables with cable box to VCR and stereo  connection from VCR to television  the VCR must be ON     18  Q  A show entry in the TV Guide On Screen    system reads     No Listing     What does that mean     A  Show information for that entry was not available during  the last TV Guide On Screen    system information update   download   Show information is updated on a daily basis     19  Q  I have seen the word    download    in reference to the  TV Guide On Screen system  What does that mean     A     Download    refers to the times throughout the day when  the TV Guide On Screen    system is receiving channel and  listings information from your Cable or over the air  antenna transmission        20     21     22     23     24     25     Q  After some show titles  I have noticed from 1 to 4 stars          What does that mean    A  These stars are a broadcast industry ratings system used to  inform you of a show   s quality  The more stars  the better  the rating     Q  What do the colors for shows in the Listings and Search  screens indicate    A  Green   Sports  Dark Blue   Children   s  Purple   Movies   Teal   Other Show     Q  How do I add  delete  or change the assigned number of  channels on the TV Guide On Screen    system     A  See the    Change c
213. rams and movies by rating  V Chip        Some TV programs and movies include signals that classify the      i Independent rating system for broadcasters  content of the program  violence  sex  dialog  language   The    V Chip feature in this TV detects the signals and blocks the Ratings Description and Content themes  programs according to the ratings you select   See the tables at TV MA   Mature Audience Only  This program is specifically designed       rig    To  1    2  3  4  5    6  Press W to highlight Edit Rating Limits and press ENTER     ht for rating descriptions    Note  Rating blocking is a function of the V Chip feature in this  TV  which supports the U S  V Chip system only    block and unblock TV programs and movies      Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon      Press W to displays the PIN code entering screen      Enter your four digit PIN code and press ENTER      Press W to highlight Enable Rating Blocking      Press    and then W to select On  and then press ENTER     Enable Rating Blocking Off  gt  Off    Edit Rating Limits On  Channels Block    Input Lock Off  Front Panel Lock Off  Game Timer Off  New PIN Code     3  Navigate     Select CH RIN Back Exit       Enable Rating Blocking  Edit Rating Limits  Channels Block    Input Lock   Front Panel Lock  Game Timer  New PIN Code    The Edit Rating Limits screen  below  appears        to be viewed by adults and therefore may be unsuitable for  children under 17    L  Crude or indecent language S  Explic
214. re yous TW i wretaling       REPEAT eA ng Se OS BT NOAA OT OS    Screen 3  Do you have Cable service connected   If you select Yes  and press ENTER   screen 4 appears   If you select No  and press ENTER   screen 12 appears     Fy PECON re    Ta apiy yo TV wh ciel rogram feng  tha TV God On Sean  apte naed Wo hno your FY receives ts gr from a cable terve    Do you have cable service connected to this TV     va  We            erase ag    ee eiaa    Screen 4  Do you have a Cable box connected   If you select Yes  and press ENTER   screen 5 appears   If you select No sists press ENTER   screen 13 appears        You have incficatedt that you have cable service  Now te TV Guide On Serom  ipten needs tome additional mfommagon    ty a cable box connected to this TV     Yer       No       Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  39     01E_039 042_4250HP95 39  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 07 PM       Chapter 5  TV Guide On Screen    setup       Setting up the TV Guide On Screen    system  continued        Screen 5  Which TV input is your cable box plugged into   If you select ANT 1  screen 6 appears   If you select Video 1  screen 7 appears   prams anen Serer    inon   fo  You may have ocho th buch ot yu TV 8 you me mre  on are     eter el Yet 4 Bh or inog seven mhi matching TY    Please indicate which TV input the cable box is plugged into         ANTI       Video 1       Screen 6  Select the channel your TV is tuned to when using  your cable 
215. right    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved   05 9 12  10 06 PM     01E_028 036_4250HP95 31  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    31    Chapter 3  Using the remote control       Remote Control functional key chart  continued                                                                                                                                                        Kay lidl Toshiba TV Cable Satellite VCR DVD LD Receiver CD PVR   TV   CBL SAT     CBL SAT   AUDIO     AUDIO   VCR   MUTE Sound mute      Sound mute     Sound mute     Sound mute       Sound mute     Sound mute     Sound mute      Sound mute      SLOW S seers ees Slow FWD  Slow FWD   Joo Slow FWD   gt      Slow REW      SKIP  lt 4   Skip FWD Skip FWD Skip FWD   gt   Skip REW PO a Skip REW   Skip REW    REW Rewind         Rewind Rewind     Rewind Rewind  PAUSE STEP   Pause         Pause Pause     Pause Pause  PLAY Play         Play Play     Play Play  FF Fast FWD          Fast FWD   Fast FWD      Fast FWD   Fast FWD  TV VCR         TV SAT TV VCR             Reverse  DISC AM FM                   Disc shift   AM FM Disc shift Replay  STOP Stop         Stop Stop     Stop Stop  REC REC Menu          Record             Record   Single Click   Double Click   Double Click   LIST LIST         oe E              FAV CH AV   FAV channel                                up down  HOME HOME      z     ES   _  SPLIT Split TV TV TV TV TV TV TV  PIC MODE PIC MODE TV TV TV TV TV TV TV  FAV SCAN FAV SCAN             
216. rvicing to qualified service personnel   Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged  in any way  such as power supply cord or plug is damaged   liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the  apparatus  the apparatus has been exposed to rain  or moisture  does not operate normally  or has been dropped        14a  CAUTION  If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or  enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does not  operate normally  take the following precautions     e ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power cord to avoid  possible electric shock or fire    e To prevent personal injury  never handle the damaged television    e ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect the TV any time  it has been damaged or dropped        15  The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or  splashing and that no objects filled with liquids  such as  vases  shall be placed on the apparatus         01E_002 004_4250HP95 3  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       Installation  Care  and Service    Installation    Follow these recommendations and precautions and heed all  warnings when installing your TV        16  Never modify this equipment  Changes or modifications  may void  a  the warranty  and b  the user   s authority to  operate this equipment under the rules of the Federal  Communications Commission        INJURY  DEATH  OR EQUIPMENT   DAMAGE  Never place the TV on  an unstable cart  stand  or table  The TV  may fall  causing serious personal injury  
217. s      6 AUDIO2    MODE    aw VO    Th  MEU  nro DEVICE et        Ni O VO  gt   S A     O oN SETI O  Sea K  S cD A  BACKI NEXT       A    RECALL    VOL AV    OVD CLEAR    DVD RTN          Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     34    34     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 06 PM    Chapter 3  Using the remote control       Multi brand remote control device codes          VCRs PVRs  Brand    ADMIRAL  AIWA  AKAI    AUDIO DYNAMIC  BELL amp HOWELL  BROKSONIC  CANON   CCE   CITIZEN   CRAIG   CURTIS MATHES  DAEWOO    DBX  DIMENSIA  EMERSON  FISHER    FUNAI    GE  GO VIDEO    GOLDSTAR  GRADIENTE    HITACHI  INSTANT REPLAY  JENSEN   Jvc  KENWOOD  LG   LXI  MAGNAVOX  MARANTZ  MARTA  MEMOREX  MGA  MINOLTA  MITSUBISHI  MULTITECH  NEC    OLYMPIC  OPTIMUS    ORION  PANASONIC    PENNEY    PENTAX     01E_028 036_4250HP95  Black    Code    0135   0127  0132  0181  0129  0114  0115   0116  0139  0111  0105  0113  0120  0126  0180  0123  0125  0143   0106  0105  0129  0106  0145  0124  0127  0143  0101  0124   0175  0139  0110  0111  0145  0143  0126  0119  0103  0125  0142   0120  0118  0105  0108  0109   0107  0113  0165  0127  0126  0120   0134  0133  0145  0124  0137  0151  0163   0149  0150  0182  0106  0170  0171  0168   0134  0156  0123  0145  0100   0127  0168  0124  0123  0139  0139  0110  0111   0134  0157  0158   0184  0185  7104  0139  0110  0106  0111  0159  0127  0106  0100  0107  0108  0105   0109  0131  0123  0124   0173  0139  0110  0111  0106  0
218. s  start and end recording on  time   Each time you press REC  you change the Record  frequency  but not the default settings  among Once   default   Regularly  Weekly  and Cancel     Note  The related Record icon appears on the show tile  each time you press REC  See    Record icons     on page 64   2  Set a show to Record from a panel menu  1  Highlight a show and press MENU to display the  Episode Options panel menu   2  Highlight SET RECORDING and press ENTER to  display the Record Options panel menu        tord Puppy  Your Secret Vale  jzpees a female puppy on Valen  r  Grey Dele  Kath Soutie T       EA ao aera 4 TA    3  Highlight the FREQUENCY field  and press 4 or P to  choose among Once  Regularly  Weekly  or Off    4  Highlight the START field  and press  lt  or    to choose  in the range from 120 minutes early to 120 minutes late  or On Time  default   On Time     5  Repeat step 4 for the END field     6  Highlight the RECORDER field and press 4 or P to  choose the recording device   Note  For connected  EEE1394 recording devices only   7  Highlight the KEEP UNTIL field and press  lt  or P to  choose how long you want to keep the Record event   Note  For connected  EEE1394 recording devices only   8  Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING   and press ENTER again to close the menu     A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the  show tile  See    Record icons    on page 64   Note  For connected  EEE1394 recording devices only     Or highlight CANCEL
219. s  videotapes  DVDs  and other materials is prohibited under the  Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries  and may subject  you to civil and criminal liability              From Cable TV    Cable box Signal splitter IN    cH3 IN OUT  OUT CH4       Stereo VCR            TV back panel       TheaterNet  ou oure  voeon N   S VIDEO       IN  pS  OOO    our    VIDEO 2    CHENE     0  amp   QS  mono gufa orol uuy  4    Note  The VIDEO AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the  ANT 1  ANT 2  VIDEO 1  VIDEO 2  and VIDEO 3 terminals when the  appropriate input mode is selected        LJ To enable the TV Guide On Screen    system to work  with your cable box and to use the TV Guide  On Screen    recording features    1  Connect the G LINK    cable according to the  instructions on page 26    2  Make sure the VCR is connected to the A V OUT  terminals on the TV  see illustration     3  Set the VCR to the appropriate line input  refer to your  VCR owner   s manual for details   and then turn OFF the  VCR    4  See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  On Screen    system    5  See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide    On Screen    system              Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  1 5     01E_013 027_4250HP95 15  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 05 PM    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver       You will need    gt  one signal splitter   gt  four coaxial cables    
220. s  videotapes  DVDs  and other materials is prohibited under the  Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries  and may subject  you to civil and criminal liability              From antenna                      Signal splitter  N  OUT OUT          Stereo VCR    VIDEO           2  IN from ANT    OUT to TV       CH3  CH4    TV back panel    TheaterNet  our   our2    VIDEO 1 iN VIDEO 2     IN  sveo HOMI AUDIO   R     JIO       y COLOR  STREAM  Ho t                           OUT   73 VIDEO  COLOR  STREAM  Fo    Mono  p  UMONO    LIMONO        Ps       AUI AUDIO    AUDIO    From satellite dish  Satellite receiver             AUDIO  LOUT             se Y Po Pr  Satellite  S  A O  O  IN  S VIDEO    COMPONENT VIDEO  OUT    Note  The VIDEO AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1   ANT 2  VIDEO 1  VIDEO 2  and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate  input mode is selected           C To use the TV Guide On Screen    recording features   1  Connect the G LINK    cable according to the  instructions on page 26   2  Make sure the VCR is connected to the A V OUT  terminals on the TV  see illustration      3  Set the VCR to the appropriate line input  refer to your  VCR owner   s manual for details   and then turn OFF the  VCR    4  See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  On Screen    system    5  See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  On Screen    system     Note  The TV Guide On Screen    system does not receive program  listings from or for a
221. s AVP to move through the options   Press the Number buttons or AVP to change the    information  as necessary     Shown fer Record o Reman tard tere  now for mare Schedule doces    Eee       3  Enter the information in the panel menu fields  You will  need to set the start and end time for the reminder  For  details  see    Set a show reminder from a panel menu      at left    Note  When setting a Manual Reminder  the frequency  option    Daily    is available instead of    Regularly     See    Remind  icons     on the following page  for a description of Reminder  icons     4  When finished entering the information in the fields   press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER   and press ENTER again to close the menu     A Remind icon for the selected frequency appears on the  show tile  See    Remind icons    on the following page     Note  Manual reminders are listed by channel number   Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the    menu  change no information  and return to the    highlighted show     05 9 12  10 09 PM    65       Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       TV Guide On Screen    Services  continued        Remind features  continued     Reminder notification banner    Based on your option settings  a notification banner will appear  on screen  if your TV is on at the scheduled Reminder time     At that time you can either press ENTER to hide the Reminder  banner  or highlight the show and press ENTER to tune to  the show  
222. s RECALL on the remote control    The following information will display on screen  if applicable    e Current input  ANT 1  ANT 2  VIDEO 1  etc    e If ANT 1 or ANT 2 is the current input  whether it is    Cable TV     CABLE     or STEREO Tuner Hold  On  off air     TV      ae NC 17  e Channel number  if in On Timer  Weekdays 12 00pm  ANT 1 or ANT 2 mode  pE pd  e Signal strength indicator      Natural   bar graph in lower right eso 5 32pm CABLE 81 1  tuil  corner of screen  for  ATSC signal only  Sample RECALL screen  Note  The signal strength indicator will react to fading and  increasing signals     e Time  if set    e On Off timer settings  if set    e Remaining time on sleep timer  if set   e Remaining time on game timer  if set      Stereo or SAP audio status   e V Chip rating status   e Picture size   e Tuner hold   if applicable       f you are recording on one tuner  for example  the digital  tuner   you will be able to change channels on the other tuner  only  the analog tuner in this example   The tuner from which  you are recording is    on hold     i e  locked  so your  recordings will not be affected by channel changes    e Video resolution    To close TV setting information on screen      E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       The TV will automatically turn itself off after approximately 15  minutes if it is tuned to a vacant channel or a station that  completes its broadcast for the day  This feature functions in  ANT 1 and ANT 2 modes only        Understanding the 
223. s of the United States and other countries  and may subject    revision of television           01E_013 027_4250HP95 19  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    From antenna or Cable       Signal splitter IN    VIDEO AUDIO  ik  R       IN from ANT LOX Cun  CI J    OUT to TV            5           The VIDEO OUT terminal does not output the POP picture        When POP mode is active  the AUDIO OUT terminals output the    sound of the active window  main or POP   For additional  information  see    Notes about recording    on page 78     Note  The VIDEO AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the  ANT 1  ANT 2  VIDEO 1  VIDEO 2  and VIDEO 3 terminals when  the appropriate input mode is selected           To use the TV Guide On Screen    recording features       Connect the G LINK    cable according to the    instructions on page 26       Make sure the VCR is connected to the A V OUT    terminals on the TV  see illustration        Set the VCR to the appropriate line input  refer to your    VCR owner   s manual for details   and then turn OFF the  VCR       See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide    On Screen    system       See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide    On Screen    system           Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  1 9    05 9 12  10 05 PM    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV       Connecting an HDMI or a DVI device to the HDMI input       The HDMI   input on your TV receives digital audio and  uncompressed digital video fro
224. save your settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER     Theater Settings    Picture Size Natural  Picture Scroll    Cinema Mode Film  Auto Aspect Ratio On  Reset Done    NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE  EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY    Avoid displaying stationary images on your  Plasma display for extended periods of  time  Fixed  non moving  images   including  but not limited to  PIP POP  windows  closed captions  video game    patterns  TV station logos  stock tickers   and websites  and special formats that do  not use the entire screen  can become  permanently ingrained in the Plasma  display and cause subtle  but permanent   ghost images  This type of damage is  NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY     Conventional picture ona Conventional picture in Natural size on See pages 4 and 5 for details   conventional TV screen your wide screen TV  74 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved    01E_069 080_4250HP95 74 05 9 12  10 09 PM    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Selecting the picture size  continued        TheaterWide 1 picture size  For 4 3 format Note   program  O e Ss   Ifyou select one of the TheaterWide   picture       The center of the picture remains close to its  original proportion  but the left and right 2 O       edges are stretched wider to fill the screen           TheaterWide 2 picture size  for letter box  programs      The picture is stretched wider to fill the width  of the screen  but only slightly 
225. sisaniinannii 88  SPECIICATIONS waten laps aan eel ii 107  SRS SD  os cyee cue pt reeds ate on acre edad 88  SRS WOW    eirasid a de oiaracea riarena raei ar aiani 88  StableSOUnd         sssssssssessssssessrrsestnrrressnnrrnsnenrenstnnrnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnt 87  Stereo sound             86  S video cablesSi nena ieee 12  Symbio    AVHD recorder        sesessssssseesssteecstecssteecsseecsseessntersntesses 24  52  SYSTEM StAl   S eaa a raaa an 54  T  TheaterNet    DEVICE and CONTROL buttons       0        cee 48  TheaterNet    control       essessssescstescsteecseeecseescstesessecsseecsieecseeesaeeesaterses 22  TheaterNet    S tup sirsenis anina 47  TheaterWide   picture SIZE          csssssessssessssessssessssesssessssessseessseessss 75  Time and date setting          eccsecssecssesssesssessesssesssesssesseescaessaeesatecsteeseees 52  Troubleshooting         csccsesssesstesstesseesstesseesstecetesetecatecatesanesseessesses 101 103  TRUBASS secessssttev ests sre taerunscansan waitin catamaran  88  TV Guide On Screen          eessseesccssescsseetescssesseseteeeseneeseseneeseees 9  39  55  V  V Chip blocking  LOCKS menu              sssssssesssssetessceetesseeeeeeeeee 97 99  VCR CONNEC ON sisihe i E  Vid 0 CableS cies ccs desea cecal chen asensi  Video input labels    Video input LOCK       eeeeseeecseesseessessseessesssesseeeeseecsseesesseesseesaeesneesaeesseeseses  W  X  Warranty    Seea a teed ee aca he ee eee E 108   Canad aerate coc ee ld ea ly  AY  UG   eater an
226. ss RECALL four times    within 5 seconds  The PIN code you previously stored will be cleared        page 97      e The V Chip feature is available for the U S  V Chip system only  page 98         102     01E_101 106_4250HP95 102  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     05 9 12  10 11 PM    Chapter 10  Troubleshooting       General troubleshooting  continued        Symptom    Solution       Recording problems    e If you use the TV s remote control to start recording  you will not be able to change inputs  page 69    open the POP window  page 78   or open the FAV SCAN multi window  page 80   If you attempt to do  so  the message    Not Available While Recording    will appear on screen     If you are recording a digital channel  you will only be able to change analog channels while the recording  is in progress  If you are recording an analog channel  you will only be able to change digital channels  while the recording is in progress  This is because the TV tuner that is being recorded  digital or analog   will be locked on the channel that is currently recording    It is recommended that you use the TV s remote control to start recording  If you use a device other than  the TV s remote control to start recording and then attempt to access a feature that is normally denied  during recording  POP mode  FAV SCAN mode  changing inputs   the recorded audio and or video may  not be what you intended to record  See pages
227. sssssssssssssesee 3 4  Camcorder COMMECTION      s s   v 1   111111trttrttrtrtnttttrtntnttrt entnte tertata terenne 14 Installation  setup     csscssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssestusssssssssstetiuessssssses 9  CH AY buttons oon  eeeceeeececsteecceeeeeecesteeeceseeecensesecenteseceneeesenseessensess 44  73 Integrated digital tumimg    sssssssssssssssssssssssuessssssssussstesssussssesseee 8  CH RT IN DUttonn  iisi eiretiers 73 IR blaster  ices cede eed teen eects cd dane 22  Channel Browser    opctcezedsccettertispraciernlehceeceneett a datebeateetine air 71 JPEG wrsctcciighetrens cei an adalat nile 89 92  Channel Number buttons   uu     ssssscccseeseescseeesseeteeeeenteseeeeeeeeeesees 44  73  Channel programming  L  Automatic programming        sscsssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssssensssese Labeling video iNputs             ceccceessessssescseesseesseecseesseseseesseeesneesseesaeeceteees 70  Manually adding and deleting Language selection          cssecseecssesseecseessseessesssesssessseesaeseatesatesaeesaeeesseeess 43  Cinema Mode eee ene aoe EE Last mode memory feature         eeeesssetessseessseetnsseetsseettnseettnset 96  Closed captions eRe eee one ee eee mE LED    NGI GATIONS a  r painoa teriaren 10  Be   evs Cte     ty   seas ee aD EE te EE OREO LOCKING video INPUTS   0    seeesssseeetsssseeettessseeetnsseeeetnnsseeeetnsssteetunee 99  fe   6  eS UC  ene ete eRe nee Re Pe TC O a LOCKS MeN    eeesesseesssstsssttsseesseessetussetuseensseetnestssetussttuasennest
228. st the code    If the device responds to the remote control    You have entered the correct code    If the device does not respond to the remote control   You may have entered the wrong code  Repeat steps 3  and 4 using another code    Note  In addition to POWER  confirm that all necessary keys  on the TV remote control operate your device  If some keys  are not operational  repeat the device code setup using  another code  if other codes are listed for your device   If    after trying all listed codes  the necessary keys do not operate  your device  use the device s original remote control     5  To control the TV  repeatedly press MODE to select    TV        Note      Although the TV remote control includes codes for many devices  it may  not include codes for some or all of the features on certain devices you  wish to control  If you are unable to program the TV remote control to  operate your device or some of the features on that device  use the  device s remote control or the controls on the device      Each time you change the batteries you will need to reprogram the  remote control      Some newer VCRs respond to either of two codes  These VCRs have a  switch labeled    VCRI VCR2     If your VCR has this kind of switch and  does not respond to the codes for your VCR brand  set the switch to the  other position     VCR1    or    VCR2     and reprogram the remote control        Searching and sampling the code of  a device  8500     If you do not know the device code for
229. stem   Press ENTER to exit    the TV Guide f into an a be na merishe penan   TM 2  Ta view program istinu prev the GUCE tey on yow TV rauta  On Screen    setup and Aep eens  watch TV     A Vis mt redo TV Guide On ain sini you    Move rg TV Yea nan 2P or pont  oe change  iets 3 VCR Bara or nodal    pa    To ems the FV Guide On Sereen fyrren tatu  press the GLIDE tey  Pen go  to the Menu Bar and highight setup     01E_039 042_4250HP95 42  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276          TV Guide On Screen    Reminder    The TV Guide On Screen    system receives program listing  data through your Cable or over the air video signal  In  order to receive regular program listing updates  remember  to do the following     1  Leave the TV in standby mode when it is not in use  by turning it OFF but leaving the power cord  plugged in    2  Ifyou have a Cable box connected  leave it ON     3  Ifyou have a VCR connected  turn it OFF when not  in use   Do not unplug the power cord   See page 14  for VCR connection instructions     4  Ifyou have more than one Cable system in your area   you may be prompted to select which Cable system   s  program data to download  If so prompted  follow the  on screen instructions     Note  If the TV power cord is unplugged for an  extended period of time  it may take up to 24 hours with  the TV in standby mode  power cord plugged in and  power OFF  to download the TV Guide On Screen     program schedule  It may take up to a week before an  entire program sc
230. still picture     2  To return to the moving picture  either press FREEZE again  press EXIT  or press  any other button     Using the FREEZE function for any    Note  purpose other than your private viewing     The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP double window or FAV SCAN may be prohibited under the Copyright  multi window is open  If you press FREEZE when either window is open  the message Laws of the United States and other     Not available    will appear  countries  and may subject you to civil     lf the TV is left in FREEZE mode  after 15 minutes it will automatically release the and criminal liability     FREEZE mode and return to the moving picture     m O0  wro TT y   amp  OO    if Q  LEA O  N ENNO  7    A  R ex jj 4a  gt   v  N               Moving picture Still picture PAT ENTER  waa EXIT  Using the favorite channel scan feature Te    R R FREEZE  You can use this feature to quickly scan and tune the channels you programmed as oe FAV SCAN    favorite channels from a nine picture multi window     Note  To use the favorite channel scan feature  you must first program channels into the  7   7 NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE  favorite channel memory  See    Programming your favorite channels    on page 46  EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY    To scan and tune your favorite channels  Avoid displaying stationary images on your    1  Press FAV SCAN  The TV will display the channels you programmed as favorite Plasma  display forexterided periggs of  h kort ANT i     j  dca 
231. stretched taller   e The top and bottom edges of the picture are  hidden  To view the hidden areas  see     Scrolling the TheaterWide   picture    on the  next page     TheaterWide 3 picture size  for letter box  programs with subtitles     e The picture is stretched wider to fill the width  of the screen  but only slightly stretched taller     e The top and bottom edges are hidden  To view  the hidden areas  such as subtitles or captions    see    Scrolling the TheaterWide   picture    on  the next page           TheaterWide 3 picture size example    Full picture size  for 16 9  480i  480p  source  programs only     e If receiving a squeezed 4 3 format program  it O    is stretched wider to fill the width of the  screen  but not stretched taller     M  e None of the picture is hidden  O O O    Full picture size example    Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_069 080_4250HP95 75  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    sizes  the top and bottom edges of the  picture  including subtitles or captions  may  be hidden  To view the hidden edges  either  scroll the picture  TheaterWide 2 and 3 only   or try viewing the program in Full or Natural  picture size     When selecting the picture size  the way  the image displays will vary depending on  currently watching     Using these functions to change the  picture size  i e   changing the height   width ratio  for any purpose other than  your private viewing may be prohibited  under the Copyright Laws o
232. sts of finding the stations in  your area that carry the TV Guide On Screen    system data  and tuning to those stations to receive the setup and  listings data      01E_101 106_4250HP95 104  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       The following are frequently asked questions about the TV Guide On Screen    system  The answers represent the most likely solutions to the    problem     7  Q   had a power outage  Do I need to go through initial    10     11     12     13     setup of the TV Guide On Screen    system again     A  No  The information you entered is stored in the TV Guide  On Screen    system memory   Note  For Cable box users  the TV must be OFF and the Cable  box must be left ON for the TV Guide On Screen    system to  receive channel line up information       Q  How do I connect the G LINK     IR blaster  cable to    the G LINK    input on the TV     A  See    Chapter 2  Connecting your TV    in this manual   You also can refer to the TV Guide On Screen    prompts  during VCR or Cable box setup       Q  When will I be able to view my TV program listings and    use other TV Guide On Screen    system features     A  You will be able to use initial program listings within 24  hours of initial setup  It may take up to one week to receive  the full eight days of program listings     Q  What should I do if I cannot complete initial setup     A  Ifyou are unable to complete initial setup using the owner s  manual and the on screen prompts  please call Toshiba s  Nati
233. t    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  59     01E_059 064_4250HP95 59 05 9 12  10 08 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program guide       TV Guide On Screen    Services  continued        SEARCH screen    SEARCH allows you to find shows by keyword  Example  Category search  alphabetically  or by category  HDTV  Movies  Sports     Children  Educational  News  Variety  Series      1  From the SEARCH screen  press W to highlight a category   in this example  MOVIES         With SEARCH highlighted in the Service Bar  press INFO to  display a help screen  Press INFO again to close the screen  2           Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within SEARCH  3  Press ENTER to display a list of all movies  organized by    date and time      Pa o   Death Bemabe st the 1  fn cr Cn abot ar ewen whe ties to tay  h ma arira gee an a age cl sadly  cmmation A          4  Highlight a show and press ENTER to watch  if on now   or press MENU to display the Episode Options panel  menu   See    Episode Options panel menu    on page 59      Ta  ta st Death Bemabe of the LAT fmre Onak aboot ae esoe whe tries to stay  but s sabotaged by   cooked coven aed a determined DA who went   hE          60 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved     7  q     01E_059 064_4250HP95 60 05 9 12  10 08 PM    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       Chapter 7  Using the TV Guide On Screen    interactive program gu
234. t One Touch  recording  will not be available unless the TV Guide On Screen     system is fully operational  However  when the TV Guide On Screen     system is not fully operational  manual recording is available as long  as the TV Guide On Screen    system has acquired the necessary date  and time data  If you experience any issues with your Symbio AVHD  Recorder  please contact the following      Inthe U S   call TACP Consumer Solutions at  800  631 3811 or visit  http   www tacp com customersupport contact asp       In Canada  call TCL Customer Service at 1 800 268 3404                 IEEE1394 device initialization    When you connect a new IEEE1394 device to the TV and turn   it on  the device immediately announces its presence to the TV    and other networked IEEE1394 devices  if any   and the   following device initialization screen automatically appears   Note  With some devices  it may take up to one minute for this  screen to appear     1  If you have connected your IEEE1394 device to an analog  input also  use the AVP buttons to select the input in  the Analog Input Used field  otherwise  leave it set to     None      See    Using analog compatible IEEE1394 devices     on page 23     2  Ifyou want to label the device  highlight Edit Label and  press ENTER     New IEEE1394 Device Initilization    Manufacturer TOSHIBA  Device Type AVHD  Custom Label   Edit Label Done    3  Press the AVP buttons to select a character for the first  space and then press ENTER     4  Re
235. t can take up to 24 hours to  receive new data     2  Q  What if I change my cable hook up to antenna or vice    versa     A  Highlight Setup in the Service Bar  Press W to highlight    Change System Settings  page 67   and then press ENTER     Follow the on screen prompts to enter new input  information and rescan channels for the new input  see    Chapter 5 for details      3  Q  What if I change cable boxes     A  Highlight Setup in the Service Bar  Press W to highlight    Change System Settings  page 67   and then press ENTER     Follow the on screen prompts to enter new input  information and rescan channels for the new input  see    Chapter 5 for details      4  Q  I used to have a cable box  but now I get direct cable     What do I do   A  Highlight Setup in the Service Bar  Press W to highlight    Change System Settings  page 67   and then press ENTER     Follow the on screen prompts to enter new input  information and rescan channels for the new input  see    Chapter 5 for details      5  Q  If I add a recorder or change my cable service  how do I    change my Setup information   A  Highlight Setup in the Service Bar  Press W to highlight    Change System Settings  page 67   and then press ENTER     Follow the on screen prompts to enter new information   see Chapter 5 for details   It can take up to 24 hours to  receive new data     6  Q  Why does it take up to 24 hours for the TV Guide    On Screen    system to be ready for use     A  The initial setup process consi
236. tal picture noise reduction  page 82   button on the remote control to    manually open the program guide     e Double window POP  page 78  and multi window Favorites  page 80  features      PC IN  Analog RGB  computer terminal  page 27         In the United States  TV Guide and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar TV Guide International  Inc  and or one of its affiliates  In Canada  TV GUIDE is a registered mark of  Transcontinental Inc   and is used under license by Gemstar TV Guide International  Inc  The TV Guide On Screen    system is manufactured under license from Gemstar TV Guide  International  Inc  and or one of its affiliates  The TV Guide On Screen    system is protected by one or more of the following issued United States patents 6 498 895  6 418 556  6 331 877   6 239 794  6 154 203  5 940 073  4 908 713  4 751 578  4 706 121     GEMSTAR TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC  AND OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OR  AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN    SYSTEM AND CANNOT GUARANTEE  SERVICE AVAILABILITY IN YOUR AREA  IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL  INC  AND OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE  LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE ACCURACY OR AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER  DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN    SYSTEM       This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U S  e CableCARD    is a tra
237. ted to each source  from the following preset    list of labels              default label   Hide  to hide an unused input in the Input Selection  window    Audio Receiver  VCR   Video Recorder  Laser Disk  Compact Disc  DVD   DIV  Satellite DSS  Cable   Game Console   Note      Ifyou set up devices in TheaterNet    the associated inputs are  automatically labeled and cannot be relabeled until you remove the  device from TheaterNet  see page 47       Ifyou set up a cable box in VIDEO 1  that input will be labeled  automatically and cannot be relabeled until you remove the device  from the TV Guide On Screen    setup      You cannot select  EEE1394 devices through the Input Selection  window  however  you can select and control IEEE1394 devices  through TheaterNet  see page 47      To label the video input sources   1  Press MENU and open the Preferences menu   2  Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER     3  Press A or W to highlight the video source you want to  label     Favorite Channels  Closed Caption Mode Off  Closed Caption Advanced    Input Labeling  Menu Language English  Home CH Setup        3  Navigate  6  Fito CH RTN EOLO EXIT A          4  Press or P to select the desired label for that input source     If a particular input is not used  you can select    Hide    as  the label  which will cause that input to be    grayed out    in  the input list and skipped over when you press INPUT on  the remote control    Note   f you select    Hide    for all of the input 
238. tep     Input Configuration  Antenna 1 In  lt  Cable  gt   Antenna 2 In Antenna  Cancel Done    6  To save your new settings  highlight Done and press  ENTER  To revert to your original settings  highlight  Cancel and press ENTER     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  43     01E_043 045_4250HP95 43  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 07 PM       Chapter 6  Setting up your TV       Programming channels into the TV   s channel memory       When you press CHANNEL A or Y on the remote control or  TV side panel  your TV will stop only on the channels stored in  the TV   s channel memory     Follow the steps below to program channels into the TV   s  channel memory     Programming channels automatically    Your TV can automatically detect all active channels in your area  and store them in its memory  After the channels are  programmed automatically  you can manually add or erase  individual channels     Note       You must configure the antenna input sources before  programming channels  see page 43        Ifthe input signal type is set to CABLE for an antenna input  the  automatic channel programming process erases channels that  were previously programmed into the TV s memory       Ifthe input signal type is set to ANTENNA  the automatic  channel programming process does NOT erase channels that  were previously programmed into the TV s memory  but adds  newly found channels to the existing set of programmed  channels  To remove a channel 
239. th is 255 characters       The memory card reader recognizes only     mp3    and    jpg     file extensions       The MP3 player supports only ISO 8859 1  US ASCII Western  European  character sets for MP3 meta data  e g  artist name   album name  song title  etc     E JPEG picture viewer     The picture viewer supports JPEG format images only          The files on your memory card must be in a file and directory  format compatible with the TV or they will not display on the TV       Images processed and or edited on a personal computer  PC   may not display properly or at all  Some digital cameras may store  images in a format that is not compatible with the TV    E MP3 audio player    e The audio player supports MP3 format files only       The files on your memory card must be in a file and directory  format compatible with the TV or they will not play        e Files processed and or edited on a personal computer  PC  may  not play properly or at all  Some MP3 files may be in a format that  is not compatible with the TV        MP3 files must have the following format     MPEG1  ISO IEC 11172 3  Layers     Sampling frequency   MPEG1  32 kHz  44 1 kHz  48 kHz     Bitrate   MPEG1  32 320 kbps       Channels   Stereo  Joint stereo  Dual channel  Single channel       ID3 Ver  1  Ver  2     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  89     01E_089 096_4250HP95 89  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 10 PM       Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features 
240. the features on that  device  use the device s remote control or the  controls on the device     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_02   036_4250HP95 30  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 06 PM    Chapter 3  Using the remote control       Remote Control functional key chart                                                                                                                                                                                        Kev Label Toshiba TV Cable Satellite VCR DVD LD Receiver CD PVR  y  TV   CBL SAT     CBL SAT   AUDIO     AUDIO   VCR   MODE Remote control device mode selection  LIGHT Lights the remote key  and toggles between enabled and disabled Illumination mode     SLEEP Sleep timer      Be     ia za x  POWER Power Power Power Power Power Power Power Power  1 Digit   Digt   Digit    Digit1   Digt1   AVinput1  Digit1  Digit 1  2 Digit2   Digit2   Digit2   Digir2   Digit2  AVinput2  Digit2   Digit2  3 Digit3   Digit3   Digit3  Digit3  Digit3  AVinput3  Digit3  Digit3  4 Digit4   Digit4   Digit4   Digit4   Digir4   AVinput4  Digit4   Digit4  5 Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 CD Digit 5 Digit 5  6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Tuner Digit 6 Digit 6  7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Phono Digit 7 Digit 7  8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Cassette Digit 8 Digit 8  9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Aux Digit 9 Digit 9  0 Digit0  DigitO  Digro   Digiro  
241. these instructions  Fa ye N  2  Keep these instructions  AL     2  3  Heed all warnings       4  Follow all instructions        5  Do not use this apparatus near water        6  Clean only with dry cloth        7  Do not block any ventilation openings  Install in  accordance with the manufacturer   s instructions        8  Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators   heat registers  stoves  or other apparatus  including  amplifiers  that produce heat           9  Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  grounding type plug  A polarized plug has two blades  two blades and a third grounding prong    The wide blade or the third prong are      e  KP   plug does not fit into your outlet  consult   an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet    10  Protect the power cord from being  plugs  convenience receptacles  and vs   the point where they exit from the    with one wider than the other  A grounding type plug has  provided for your safety  If the provided   walked on or pinched  particularly at ae  apparatus  A       11  Only use attachments accessories specified by the  manufacturer        12  Use only with the cart  stand  tripod   bracket  or table specified by the  manufacturer  or sold with the  apparatus  When a cart is used  use  caution when moving the cart apparatus  combination to avoid injury from tip over           13  Unplug this apparatus during  lightning storms or when  unused for long periods of  time           14  Refer all se
242. time  Fixed  non moving  images   channels for the current input in a nine picture multi window   including  but not limited to  PIP POP    To display the channels you programmed as favorite channels for the other input  windows  closed captions  video game    you must change antenna inputs first  page 69   and then press FAV SCAN   GS eae ee a To    not use the entire screen  can become  permanently ingrained in the Plasma  display and cause subtle  but permanent   ghost images  This type of damage is  NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY   See pages 4 and 5 for details           2  Highlight the window for the channel you want to view   Either    press the channel   s multi window position number  1 9  as illustrated above   and not the actual channel number  to highlight the window   Or    use the A Y  lt P buttons to highlight the window   The highlighted window will display as a moving picture     3  Press ENTER to close the multi window and tune the TV to the highlighted channel           80 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_069 080_4250HP95 80 05 9 12  10 09 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276          Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Adjusting the picture       Selecting the picture mode    You can select your desired picture settings from four picture  modes  as described below        Mode Picture Quality   Sports Bright and dynamic picture  factory setting   Standard Standard picture settings  factory setting    Movie Lower co
243. to   2 O Cable Box Note  Make sure the POP is not on channel 3 or 4    4   ohange channels o 5 Off  Unlocks all video input sources    o 6   o 7 Allow All 6  Press ENTER           Note  When a CableCARD    is inserted  Video  will behave the same as   xO 10 Done Video lock   Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  99     01E_097 100_4250HP95 99  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 11 PM            Chapter 9  Using the Locks menu                         Lal i  TM Lal  Using the GameTimer Using the panel lock feature  You can use the GameTimer to set a time limit for playing a You can lock the side panel buttons to prevent your settings  video game  30 120 minutes   When the GameTimer is from being changed accidentally  by children  for example    activated  the TV enters VIDEO LOCK mode and locks out When the panel lock is On  none of the controls on the TV side  the input source for the video game device  panel will operate except POWER   To set the GameTimer     To lock the side panel    1  Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon  l  Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon    2  Press W to display the PIN code entering screen  2  Press W to display the PIN code entering screen    3  Enter your four digit PIN code and press ENTER  3  Enter your four digit PIN code and press ENTER    4  Press y to highlight Game Timer and press  gt   4  Press AA to highlight Front Panel Lock    5  Press A or   to select the length of time until the 
244. to unlock     Q  Can I move my favorite stations to the top of the  TV Guide On Screen    display screen     A  Yes  Use the    Change channel display    feature to make  adjustments  see page 67   Highlight the station call letters  to be moved  then use up down arrows  and or Number  buttons to reassign the position of the station     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  1 05     01E_101 106_4250HP95 105  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 11 PM    Chapter 10  Troubleshooting       TV Guide On Screen    FAQs  continued        OPERATIONS  26  Q  How can I look for a specific show in the TV Guide    On Screen    system    A  SEARCH lets you find shows by keyword  alphabetically   or by category  HDTV  Movies  Sports  Children   Educational  News  Variety  Series      27  Q  My cable box will not change channels with the  TV Guide On Screen    system  What   s wrong     A  There are several possibilities     a  The incorrect cable box code was entered during TV Guide  On Screen    initial setup  Redo initial setup     b  The G LINK     IR blaster  cable may not be connected  properly  see page 26     c  The cable box has no remote capability and is  incompatible     28  Q  How do I resize or close the Info window     A  Press the INFO button on the remote control to resize the  Info window  Press the INFO button again to close the  Info window     29  Q  Is there a way to go directly to the next day   s listings  without scrolling through
245. ty Compliance Statement  Part 15      The Toshiba 42HP95 50HP95 Plasma Color  Televisions comply with Part 15 of the FCC rules     Operation is subject to the following two conditions   1    this device may not cause harmful interference  and  2    this device must accept any interference that may cause  undesired operation     The party responsible for compliance to these rules is   Toshiba America Consumer Products  L L C    82 Totowa Rd  Wayne  NJ 07470    Ph   973  628 8000    Note  This equipment has been tested and found to comply with  the limits for a Class B digital device  pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC  rules  These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  against harmful interference in a residential installation  This  equipment generates  uses  and can radiate radio frequency energy  and  if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions   may cause harmful interference to radio communications  However     there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  installation  If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  radio or television reception  which can be determined by removing  and applying power to the equipment  the user is encouraged to try  to correct the interference by one or more of the following  measures       Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna       Increase the separation between the equipment and the  receiver       Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different  from that
246. u cannot  use the picture viewer and audio player at the same time      Make all the desired adjustments to the surround  bass  treble  and  balance before starting the MP3 audio player      Please be advised that you must obtain permission from the  applicable copyright owners to download copyrighted content   including music files  in any format  including the MP3 format  prior to  the downloading thereof  Toshiba has no right to grant and does not  grant permission to download any copyrighted content     To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is not  already inserted   1  Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card  slot on the side of your TV  see page 90 for details    Note     Never insert more than one memory card at a time     Be sure to insert the card correctly   label side facing left and    the end with the notched corner  if applicable  inserted into the  memory card slot       When a CompactFlash memory card is inserted correctly  the  ejector button pops out  see page 90      2  If you have only MP3 files on the memory card  the audio  player will launch within a few seconds after being inserted  and begin playing the first MP3 file on the memory card     J  Audio Player Memory STICK   gt D Title    Artist  Ser No 1 in D  Op 11      SCO Sir Charles    sn o a Il  ol  Requiem  Op  5  IV  R      Robert Shaw Atla    ma    gt  v    Rapsodie Espagnole       Jesus Lopez Cobo    iRIMGollghe Sonate yin ovenient  Ill  Sanctus  Sanctu      Boston Baroq
247. uct registration card or register your  Plasma Television online at www tacp toshiba com service as soon as  possible  By registering your Plasma Television you will enable TACP to bring  you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to  contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the  U S  Consumer Product Safety Act  Failure to complete and return the  product registration card does not diminish your warranty rights     Your Responsibility    THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING   CONDITIONS     1  You must retain your original bill of sale or provide other proof of  purchase     2  All warranty servicing of this Plasma Television must be performed by an  Authorized TACP Service Station     3  The warranties from TACP are effective only if this Plasma Television is  purchased and operated in the Continental U S A  or Puerto Rico         4  Labor service charges for set installation  setup  adjustment of customer  controls  and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered  by this warranty  Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna  systems  misaligned satellite dishes  cable television distribution  VCRs   DVD players recorders  personal computer level IEEE1394 devices  and   any other connected signal source device are your responsibility     5  Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited   above  and do not extend to any Plasma Television or parts that have  
248. ue M     Piano Sonata  K  545      A M Classical  amp  A M Classical  Path  tique Sonata  m      A M Classical  Chopin Prelude No        Andrys   Piano Sonata  K  545      A M Classical    4  Moolight Sonata  mo    A M Classical    71         a  Navigate  1  Select Exit    3  Press AV  lt 4 P to navigate to the rewind  pause  fast  forward  skip backward  skip forward  volume  and mute  buttons  or to select another MP3  and then press ENTER     To use the mute function    Press AV  lt P to select the 1K  mute  button  and then press  ENTER  See page 86 for details on muting the sound     Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved  9 1     01E_089 096_4250HP95 91  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 10 PM    Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer MP3 audio player  continued        Using the MP3 audio player  continued     To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is  already inserted     1  Press MENU and open  the Applications menu     2  Highlight Audio Player TV Guide On Screen  and press ENTER          icture Viewer  Digital CC Audio Selector  3  Press AV  lt 4 P to CableCARD    navigate to the rewind    pause  fast forward  skip  backward  skip forward   volume  and mute buttons  and then press ENTER      5  Navigate      Select  CHINE Teva EXIT sag    Note  After 30 seconds a screen saver will appear  To access the  screensaver immediately  press any button on the remote control     To c
249. val 2 Sec  v AVHD Skip Time 15 min     t Navigate     Select GMJ Back EI Exit    3  Open the Terrestrial menu  highlight Channel Add Delete   and then press ENTER        Input Configuration  Channel Program  Channel Add Delete  Signal Meter    TA E C LEE ExT Exit    4  The illustration below left shows channels programmed for          To add a channel to the channel memory   Highlight the unchecked box next to the channel number  you want to add  and then press ENTER to check the box   To manually add digital subchannels on a physical channel     Use the Channel Numbers and the Dash      100  on the  remote control to enter the channel number  for example   56 1     If the channel is found  the number will be added to the list  and the box will be checked     If the channel is not found  a message will appear     To remove a channel from the channel memory   Highlight the checked box next to the channel number you  want to remove  and then press ENTER to uncheck the  box    To save your new settings   Highlight Done and press ENTER     To revert to your original settings   Highlight Cancel and press ENTER before saving     To remove all channels from the channel memory   Highlight Reset and press ENTER  and then highlight  Done and press ENTER    Note       This action applies to the current antenna input only  To  delete add channels on the other input  highlight the input  you want  ANTI or ANT 2  and press ENTER       This action cannot be canceled unless you highlight Can
250. ved  71  7     01E_069 080_4250HP95 71 05 9 12  10 09 PM    Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276       Chapter 8  Using the TV   s features       Tuning channels  continued        Using the Channel Browser     continued   g    Adding and clearing channels in the  channel history    Adding channels to the channel history    The channel browser automatically creates a history of the   last 32 channels that were tuned in the current input  ANT 1   ANT 2  and Cable Box inputs only   A separate history will be  stored for each of these inputs     If you change the input you are viewing     a  you will begin a channel history for that input if one did  not exist  or    b  you will return to the existing channel history for that input  if one had already been started     The channel browser will store the following channels     e All channels that are tuned using the numeric buttons on the  remote control     e All channels that are tuned for at least 7 seconds using the  CH AY buttons or the FAV CH A    buttons on the remote    control     Note      The channel browser banner will not appear when the POP double  window is open  however  channels tuned while the POP double  window is open will be added to the channel browser history for the  current input     The channel browser banner will not appear in the FAV SCAN   favorite scan  multi window  Channels that appear in the FAV SCAN  multi window will not be added to the channel browser history   however  channels that are tuned fro
251. w  for the current ANT input    ENTER to uncheck it  ag 2 f  m    Press FAV SCAN  See page 80 for details   Note  If you try to add more than o 4  nine favorite channels per input  an A E EE Note   error message will appear  You will     To tune to a channel from the FAV SCAN mode  highlight a  need to delete  uncheck  a channel ME r e n window and press ENTER  before you can add another  m o    Cancel        von   Done   To scan your favorite channels for another input  you will need to  When done  highlight Done and press ENTER  change the Input Selection first    To program favorite channels for another input   Either    Highlight ANT 1  ANT 2  or Cable Box which  will change the favorite channel settings in the selected  input   This will not change the TV   s current input   ne  Or    Press INPUT to select ANT 1  ANT 2  or Cable Box        e a 100  and then repeat steps 1 4  E a a       Channel Numbers             Cable Box    will appear only if you connected a cable box AV  to your TV    CH6 Empty Empty mua   O Cable Box  geil  Ee asa FAV CH AW  Empty Empty Empty    FAV SCAN  46 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_046 054_4250HP95 46 05 9 12  10 07 PM  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    Chapter 6  Setting up your TV       Setting up and using TheaterNet    on screen device control       The TheaterNet feature allows you to control many brands of  TEEE1394 and or infrared remote controlled A V devices  through your TV using on screen 
252. wing the digital signal meter       A CableCARD    enables you to view encrypted digital channels     See page 13 for connection and subscription information     After the CableCARD    is inserted  a CableCARD    option  appears in the Applications menu  with informational screens    provided by your digital CableCARD    service  see illustrations  below      A CableCard Connected    Acquiring    channel information     CableCard services will only operate  with cable signal connected to Antenna 1        To view the CableCARD    menu   1  Press MENU and open the Applications menu   2  Highlight CableCARD    and press        3  Press W or A to select one of the side menu items and press  ENTER to display the information      AEDE    Applications  TV Guide On Screen IP Service  Audio Player Condition  S  Picture Viewer CableCARD tm  Status  Digital CC Audio Selector Network Setup    CableCARD la CableCARD tm  Pairing        E Navigate    Select GEM  Back ExT Exit    Note  The CableCARD  menu is for informational purposes  only and has no user adjustable options        You can view the digital signal meter for ANT 1 and ANT 2  digital TV input sources only   To view the digital signal meter    1  Press MENU and open the Setup menu    2  Highlight Installation and press ENTER   A new set of    Installation menu icons will appear on screen  as shown in    step 3 below      aC ci A   Setup   D   Sleep Timer   On Off Timer    PC Settings   HDMI Audio Auto   Slide Show Interval 2 Sec
253. xit    3  Open the System Status menu  highlight System  Information  and then press ENTER        4  Use the  lt P buttons to scroll through the menu bar to  check the Product Information and Software Version     System Information System Information   lt  Product Information  gt  st Software Version  gt   Brand  Toshiba ra  Model  42HP95 Jun 13 2005   13 54 14  IEEE1394 GUID  00003914 28343803 FW 1 41  Sub 41  Done Done    To close the screen and return to the Installation menu   Highlight Done and press ENTER    To return to normal viewing   Press EXIT     Restore Factory Defaults  To restore all settings and channels to their factory default  values    1  Follow steps 1 3 above     2  Use the  lt P buttons to scroll through the menu bar to  select Factory Defaults     System Information   lt  Factory Defaults  gt     This window provides the ability to reset the TV  settings     Type in your PIN now  or  0000  if no PIN has  been set  to restore settings to their factory  default values     Done    3  Enter your PIN code  or 0000 if no PIN code has been set      4  Highlight Yes and press ENTER  The TV will turn off  automatically after a few seconds  After the TV turns off   unplug the TV power cord and then plug it in again to  complete the restore process     To cancel the reset     Highlight No and press ENTER        54 Copyright    2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  All rights reserved      01E_046 054_4250HP95 54  Black     E  42 50HP95  web 213 276    05 9 12  10 08 PM      
254. y 97  Connecting DEVICES  acto ese ko pelts tect ree  Channels  blocking             99  CompactFlash   memory Cards   cscssssssssessssessssesneessssessneeeeeee Enable rating blocking         98  Component video cables o  issesscssssssssssssssssssssssssssssstsssssussssstneet ETNEA NaI ET aaa SAN PAA EAE EE AE TE 100  Component video  ColorStream          ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssee 11  18 New PIN COE iiai irenstearen ioien rasiaan 97  Unlocking programs temporarily            scccsececssesseesseesseeeseeeees 99  D Video inputs  locking           seecceccsescseecseecseecseecsecsecseesseesetesstesseesess 99  Device CONNECTIONS o enrrnrrerntnntnminminnnnnnnninin 13727  Eoiate M ME E E EE oes teereee eee eeeeree eee 94  Defaults  restore TV factory        scscseccsescseesseesseesseessetesetesetesetesetesetess 54  Digital  Audio OUt  21  Digital Signal meter             scssseesssessssssseesseesseesseessessneesneesseesneesseeseteceseess 53  DNR  Digital Noise Reduction                sescseeeseeeseeesetesetestesetesstessteees 82  Dolby Digital             ccecseeseeeseeeeee   21  88  Double window POP feature            scccsessccsssecsssetesssttsseseetseesteeeseeees 78  DVD player connection           cccssesseesseesseesseeesseesseesneesneesneesseesaeesaees 17  18  DVIS cocoate eae eee 24  52  DVI connection  raees aaae cs cistccate dasccstecansestaseccusepadan  ebe 20  Dynamic Contrast          csesccccesscsssstessssseesssstesecsnteeccenteeeeaeeseeneeseeenteeseensess 83  1 1 
255. y on Parts and Labor    TACP warrants this Plasma Television and its parts against defects in  materials or workmanship for a period of one  1  year after the date of  original retail purchase  DURING THIS PERIOD  TACP WILL  AT TACP   S  OPTION  REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR  REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR  LABOR  During this period  TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will  come to your home when warranty service is required  Depending on the  type of repair required  the service will either be performed in your home or  the Plasma Television will be taken to a TACP Authorized Service Station for  repair and returned to your home at no cost to you        Rental Units    The warranty for Plasma Television rental units begins on the date of the first  rental or thirty  30  days after the date of shipment to the rental firm   whichever comes first        Limited Warranty for Commercial Units    TACP warrants Plasma Televisions that are sold and used for commercial  purposes as follows  all parts are warranted against defects in materials or  workmanship for a period of ninety  90  days after the date of original retail  purchase  DURING THIS PERIOD  TACP WILL  AT TACP   S OPTION   REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR  REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU     Owner   s Manual and Product Registration Card  Read this owner s manual thoroughly before operating this Plasma Television     Complete and mail the enclosed prod
256. yper band  AA through ZZ  AAA  BBB  PC AUDIO INPUT   Ultra band  65 through 94  100 through 135  3 5 mm stereo mini jack  Power Source VIDEO AUDIO OUTPUT  also for recording    120 V AC  60 Hz VIDEO  1 V p p   75 ohm  negative sync   Power Consumption AUDIO  150 mV rms   30  modulation equivalent   42HP95  337 W  average  2 2 k ohm or less     57 W in standby mode  Using a CableCARD      53 W in standby mode  Without a CableCARD      50HP95  407 W  average   57 W in standby mode  Using a CableCARD      53 W in standby mode  Without a CableCARD     G LINK    and IR OUTPUT   3 V p p   3 5 mm mono socket  IR blaster cables supplied     VARIABLE AUDIO OUTPUT   0 300 mV  rms   30  modulation equivalent   2 2 k ohm or less     Audio Power    10W  10 W IEEE1394 INPUT OUTPUT   Speaker Type IEEE1394 compliant 4 pin  Main  Four 2 3 8 x 4 3 4 inches  60 x 120 mm  DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT   Tweeter  Two 1 1 4 inches  32 mm  round Optical type  Video Audio Terminals Headphone jack   S VIDEO INPUT     3 5 mm stereo  Y   1 V p p   75 ohm  negative sync  i    C   0 286 V p p   burst signal   75 ohm Dimensions  42HP95  Width  43 3 8 inches  1100 mm   VIDEO AUDIO INPUT    Height  30 3 4 inches  778 mm   VIDEO 1 Vipep    73 ohm  negativesyne Depth  15 3 8 inches  390 mm   AUDIO  150 mV rms   30  modulation equivalent  50HP95  Width  49 5 8 inches  1258 mm   22 k ohm or greater  Height  34 5 8 inches  877 mm   ColorStream    component video  HD INPUT  Depth  15 3 8 inches  390 mm     Y  1V p p   75 
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
PitchHawk-G2 Owner's Manual  取扱説明書 - 三菱電機  ASUS T7459 User's Manual  Hansgrohe 04215800 Instructions / Assembly  HP Photosmart 3310 All-in-One Printer Service Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file